diff --git a/gramps2/help/C/authors.xml b/gramps2/help/C/authors.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index 3676ff2f5..000000000
--- a/gramps2/help/C/authors.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,122 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-
- About GRAMPS
- &app; was written by Donald N. Allingham
- (don@gramps-project.org).
-
-
- The somewhat incomplete list of contributors includes (in alphabetical order):
-
-
-Tim Allen
-Larry Allingham
-Jens Arvidsson
-Kees Bakker
-Marcos Bedinelli
-Wayne Bergeron
-Stefan Bjork
-Douglas S. Blank
-Radu Bogdan Mare
-Alexander Bogdashevsky
-Richard Bos
-Matt Brubeck
-Nathan Bullock
-Lorenzo Cappelletti
-Pier Luigi Cinquantini
-Bruce J. DeGrasse
-Daniel Durand
-Alexandre Duret-Lutz
-Billy C. Earney
-Baruch Even
-Bernd Felsche
-Egyeki Gergely
-Michel Guitel
-Steve Hall
-David R. Hampton
-Martin Hawlisch
-Anton Huber
-Frode Jemtland
-Mark Knoop
-Greg Kuperberg
-Arkadiusz Lipiec
-Lars Kr. Lundin
-Radek Malcic
-Benny Malengier
-Leonid Mamtchenkov
-Brian Matherly
-Tino Meinen
-Serge Noiraud
-Frederick Noronha
-Jeffrey C. Ollie
-Jiri Pejchal
-Donald A. Peterson
-Guillaume Pratte
-Alexandre Prokoudine
-Laurent Protois
-Matthieu Pupat
-Jérôme Rapinat
-Trevor Rhodes
-Alexander Roitman
-Soren Roug
-Jason Salaz
-Julio Sanchez
-Bernd Schandl
-Martin Senftleben
-Yaakov Selkowitz
-Gary Shao
-Arturas Sleinius
-Jim Smart
-Steve Swales
-Eero Tamminen
-Samuel Tardieu
-Richard Taylor
-James Treacy
-Lubo Vasko
-Sebastian Voecking
-Xing Wang
-Tim Waugh
-Jesper Zedlitz
-
-If you know of somebody else who should be listed here, please let us know.
-
-
-
- To find more information about &app;, please visit the
- GRAMPS Project
- Web page.
-
- To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding this application or
- this manual, use the help menu in &app;, or follow the directions
- on this site.
-
-
- This program is distributed under the terms of the GNU
- General Public license as published by the Free Software
- Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option)
- any later version. A copy of this license can be found at this
- link, or in the file
- COPYING included with the source code of this program.
-
-
diff --git a/gramps2/help/C/bugs.xml b/gramps2/help/C/bugs.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index df83cfc8f..000000000
--- a/gramps2/help/C/bugs.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Known Bugs and Limitations
-
-The known limitations include the BSDDB performance issues related
-to caching and the memory size. As long as the BSDDB cache fits completely
-into the available memory on the system, the performance should be
-adequate. When the cache size exceeds that of the free memory and
-portions of database cache start to be swapped onto the disk, the performance
-degrades appreciably. This can be solved by adjusting the BSDDB cache
-size for the large databases.
-
-
-
diff --git a/gramps2/help/C/cmdline.xml b/gramps2/help/C/cmdline.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index d81ab514e..000000000
--- a/gramps2/help/C/cmdline.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,504 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Command line reference
- This appendix provides the reference to the command line
- capabilities available when launching &app; from the terminal.
-
- &app; was designed to be an interactive
- program. Therefore it uses graphical display and cannot run from the
- true non-graphical console. It would take an enormous amount of effort
- to enable it to run in a text-only terminal. This is why the set of
- command line options does not aim to completely get rid of dependency
- on the graphical display. Rather, it merely makes certain (typical) tasks
- more convenient. It also allows one to execute these tasks from the scripts.
- However, the graphical display must be accessible at all times!
-
-
- To summarize, the use of the command line options provides
- non-interactive behavior, but does not get rid of graphical display
- dependency. Take it or leave it!
-
-
-
-
- Available options
-
- This section provides the reference list of all command line
- options available in &app;. If you want to know more than just
- a list of options, see next sections:
- and .
-
-
- Format options
- The format of any file destined for opening, importing,
- or exporting can be specified with the
- -f format
- option. The acceptable format values
- are listed below.
-
-
-
- grdb
- &app; database. This format is available
- for opening, import, and export. When not specified, it can be
- guessed if the filename ends with .grdb
-
-
- gramps-xml
- &app; XML database. This format is available
- for opening, import, and export. When not specified, it can be
- guessed if the filename ends with .gramps
-
-
- gedcom
- GEDCOM file. This format is available
- for opening, import, and export. When not specified, it can be
- guessed if the filename ends with .ged
-
-
- gramps-pkg
- &app; package. This format is available
- for import and export. When not specified, it can be
- guessed if the filename ends with .gpkg
-
-
- geneweb
- GeneWen file This format is available
- for import and export. When not specified, it can be
- guessed if the filename ends with .gw
-
-
- wft
- Web Family Tree. This format is available
- for export only. When not specified, it can be guessed
- if the filename ends with .wft
-
-
- iso
- CD image. This format is available
- for export only. It must always be specified explicitly.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Opening options
- There are two ways to give &app; the name of the file to
- be opened:
-
- supply bare file name
-
- use the
- -O filename or
- -open=filename option
-
-
-
-
- If the filename is given without any option flag, the attempt
- to open the file will be made, and then the interactive &app; session
- will be launched.
-
-
- If no option is given, just the file name, &app; will
- ignore the rest of the command line arguments. Use the -O flag
- to open the file and do something with the data.
-
-
- The format can be specified with the
- -f format or
- --format=format
- option, immediately following the filename.
- If not specified, the guess will be attempted based on
- the filename.
-
-
- Only grdb, gramps-xml,
- and gedcom formats can be opened directly.
- For other formats, you will need to use the import option
- which will set up the empty database and then import data into it.
-
-
- Only a single file can be opened. If you need to combine
- data from several sources, you will need to use
- the import option.
-
-
-
- Import options
- The files destined for import can be specified with the
- -i filename
- or --import=filename
- option. The format can be specified with the
- -f format or
- --format=format
- option, immediately following the filename.
- If not specified, the guess will be attempted based on
- the filename.
-
-
- More than one file can be imported in one command.
- If this is the case, &app; will incorporate the data from
- the next file into the database available at the moment.
-
-
- When more than one input file is given, each has to be preceded
- by -i flag. The files are imported in the
- specified order, i.e.
- -i file1
- -i file2
- and
- -i file2
- -i file1
-
- might produce different GRAMPS IDs in the resulting database.
-
-
- Export options
- The files destined for export can be specified with the
- -o filename or
- --output=filename
- option. The format can be specified with the -f
- option immediately following the filename.
- If not specified, the guess will be attempted based on
- the filename. For iso format,
- the filename
- is actually the name of directory the &app; database will be written
- into. For grdb, gramps-xml, gedcom, wft, geneweb,
- and gramps-pkg, the filename
- is the name of the resulting file.
-
-
- More than one file can be exported in one command.
- If this is the case, &app; will attempt to write several files
- using the data from the database available at the moment.
-
-
- When more than one output file is given, each has to be
- preceded by -o flag. The files are written one
- by one, in the specified order.
-
-
- Action options
- The action to perform on the imported data can be
- specified with the
- -a action or
- --action=action
- option. This is done after all imports are successfully completed.
-
-
- Currently available actions are:
-
-
-
- summary
- This action is the same as
- ReportsView
- Summary
-
-
-
- check
- This action is the same as
- Tools
- Database Processing
- Check and Repair.
-
-
- report
- This action allows producing reports
- from the command line. As reports generally have many options
- of their own, this action should be followed by the report option
- string. The string is given using the
- -p option_string or
- --options=option_string
- option.
-
-
-
- The report option string should satisfy the following conditions:
-
-
-
-
- It must not contain any spaces. If some arguments
- need to include spaces, the string should be enclosed with
- quotation marks.
-
-
- Option string must list pairs of option names
- and values.
-
-
- Within a pair, option name and value must be
- separated by the equal sign.
-
-
- Different pairs must be separated by commas.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Most of the report options are specific for every report.
- However, there some common options.
-
-
-
-
- name=report_name
-
- This mandatory option determines which report will be
- generated. If the supplied report_name does not correspond
- to any available report, the error message will be printed
- followed by the list of available reports.
-
-
-
- show=all
-
- This will produce the list of names for all options available for
- a given report.
-
-
-
- show=option_name
-
- This will print the description of the functionality supplied
- by the option_name, as well as what are the acceptable types
- and values for this option.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Use the above options to find out everything about a given report.
-
-
-
- If an option is not supplied, the last used value will be used.
- If this report has never been generated before, then the
- value from last generated report will be used when applicable.
- Otherwise, the default value will be used.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- When more than one output action is given, each has to be
- preceded by -a flag. The actions are performed
- one by one, in the specified order.
-
-
-
-
- &cmdplug;
-
-
- Operation
-
-
-
-
- If the first argument on the command line does not start
- with dash (i.e. no flag), &app; will attempt to open the file
- with the name given by the first argument and start interactive
- session, ignoring the rest of the command line arguments.
-
-
-
- If the -O flag is given, then &app; will
- try opening the
- supplied file name and then work with that data, as instructed by
- the further command line parameters.
-
-
- Only one file can be opened in a single invocation
- of &app;. If you need to get data from multiple sources, use
- the importing options by using -i flag.
-
-
-
-
- With or without the -O flag, there could
- be multiple imports, exports, and actions specified further on
- the command line by using -i,
- -o, and -a flags.
-
-
-
- The order of -i, -o,
- or -a options with respect to each does not matter.
- The actual execution order always is: all imports (if any) -> all
- exports (if any) -> all actions (if any).
-
- But opening must always be first!
-
-
-
- If no -O or -i
- option is given, &app; will launch
- its main window and start the usual interactive session with the empty
- database, since there is no data to process, anyway.
-
-
-
- If no -o or -a options
- are given, &app; will launch its main window and start the usual
- interactive session with the database resulted from opening
- and all imports (if any). This database resides in the
- import_db.grdb file under the
- ~/.gramps/import/ directory.
-
-
-
- Any errors encountered during import, export, or action, will
- be either dumped to stdout (if these are exceptions handled by &app;)
- or or to stderr (if these are not handled). Use usual shell redirections
- of stdout and stderr to save messages and errors in files.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Examples
-
-
-
-
- To import four databases (whose formats can be determined from
- their names) and then check the resulting database for errors, one may
- type:
-
-
- gramps
- -ifile1.ged
- -i file2.gpkg
- -i ~/db3.gramps
- -i file4.wft
- -a check
-
-
-
- To explicitly specify the formats in the above example, append
- filenames with appropriate -f options:
-
- gramps
- -i file1.ged
- -f gedcom
- -i file2.gpkg
- -f gramps-pkg
- -i ~/db3.gramps
- -f gramps-xml
- -i file4.wft
- -f wft
- -a check
-
-
-
-
- To record the database resulting from all imports, supply
- -o flag (use -f
- if the filename does not allow &app; to guess the format):
-
- gramps
- -i file1.ged
- -i file2.gpkg
- -o ~/new-package
- -f gramps-pkg
-
-
-
-
- To save any error messages of the above example into files
- outfile and
- errfile, run:
-
- gramps
- -i file1.ged
- -i file2.dpkg
- -o ~/new-package
- -f gramps-pkg
- >outfile
- 2>errfile
-
-
-
-
- To import three databases and start interactive &app;
- session with the result:
-
- gramps
- -i file1.ged
- -i file2.gpkg
- -i ~/db3.gramps
-
-
-
-
-
- To open a database and, based on that data, generate timeline
- report in PDF format putting the output into the
- my_timeline.pdf file:
-
- gramps
- -O file.grdb
- -a report
- -p name=timeline,off=pdf,of=my_timeline.pdf
-
-
-
- Use the name=timeline,show=all
- to find out about all available options for the timeline report. To
- find out details of a particular option, use
- show=option_name,
- e.g. name=timeline,show=off
- string.
-
- To learn about available report names, use
- name=show string.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Finally, to start normal interactive session type:
- gramps
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/gramps2/help/C/cmdplug.xml b/gramps2/help/C/cmdplug.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index 369ed7b63..000000000
--- a/gramps2/help/C/cmdplug.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1528 +0,0 @@
-
- Detailed plugin option reference
-
- Reports
-
- Common Options
-
-
- style: =name
-
- Style name.
-
- default
-
-
-
-
- pagebbg: =0/1
-
- Page break between generations.
-
-
-
- off: =format
-
- Output file format.
-
- print
- sxw
- ps
- pdf
- svg
-
-
-
-
- of: =filename
-
- Output file name. MANDATORY
- Value: /home/shura/whatever_name
-
-
-
- papero: =num
-
- Paper orientation number.
-
- 0 Portrait
- 1 Landscape
-
-
-
-
- gen: =num
-
- Number of generations to follow.
-
-
-
- filter: =num
-
- Filter number.
-
-
-
- template: =name
-
- Template name (HTML only).
- Value: /home/shura/whatever_name
-
-
-
- papers: =name
-
- Paper size name.
-
- Letter
- Legal
- A0
- A1
- A2
- A3
- A4
- A5
- B0
- B1
- B2
- B3
- B4
- B5
- B6
- B
- C
- D
- E
-
-
-
-
- dispf: =str
-
- Display format for the outputbox.
-
-
-
- id: =ID
-
- Gramps ID of a central person. MANDATORY
-
-
-
-
-
- Ancestor Chart
-
-
- name:
-
- ancestor_chart
-
-
-
-
-
- Ancestor Chart (Wall Chart)
-
-
- name:
-
- ancestor_chart2
-
-
-
- singlep: =0/1
-
- Whether to scale to fit on a single page.
-
- Do not scale to fit
- Scale to fit
-
-
-
-
- compress: =0/1
-
- Whether to compress chart.
-
- Do not compress chart
- Compress chart
-
-
-
-
- title: =str
-
- Title string for the report
- Value: Whatever String You Wish
-
-
-
-
-
- Ahnentafel Report
-
-
- name:
-
- ancestor_report
-
-
-
-
-
- Comprehensive Ancestors Report
-
-
- name:
-
- ancestors_report
-
-
-
- cites: =0/1
-
- Whether to cite sources.
-
- Do not cite sources
- Cite sources
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Descendant Graph
-
-
- name:
-
- descendant_graph
-
-
-
-
-
- Descendant Report
-
-
- name:
-
- descend_report
-
-
-
-
-
- Detailed Ancestral Report
-
-
- name:
-
- det_ancestor_report
-
-
-
- repdate: =0/1
-
- Whether to replace missing Dates with blanks.
-
- Do not replace missing Dates
- Replace missing Dates
-
-
-
-
- incsources: =0/1
-
- Whether to include source references.
-
- Do not include sources
- Include sources
-
-
-
-
- incphotos: =0/1
-
- Whether to include images.
-
- Do not include images
- Include images
-
-
-
-
- desref: =0/1
-
- Whether to add descendant references in child list.
-
- Do not add references
- Add references
-
-
-
-
- computeage: =0/1
-
- Whether to compute age.
-
- Do not compute age
- Compute age
-
-
-
-
- fulldates: =0/1
-
- Whether to use full dates instead of just year.
-
- Do not use full dates
- Use full dates
-
-
-
-
- incnames: =0/1
-
- Whether to include other names.
-
- Do not include other names
- Include other names
-
-
-
-
- listc: =0/1
-
- Whether to list children.
-
- Do not list children
- List children
-
-
-
-
- incevents: =0/1
-
- Whether to include events.
-
- Do not include events
- Include events
-
-
-
-
- usenick: =0/1
-
- Whether to use the nick name as the first name.
-
- Do not use nick name
- Use nick name
-
-
-
-
- incnotes: =0/1
-
- Whether to include notes.
-
- Do not include notes
- Include notes
-
-
-
-
- omitda: =0/1
-
- Whether to omit duplicate ancestors.
-
- Do not omit duplicates
- Omit duplicates
-
-
-
-
- repplace: =0/1
-
- Whether to replace missing Places with blanks.
-
- Do not replace missing Places
- Replace missing Places
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Detailed Descendant Report
-
-
- name:
-
- det_descendant_report
-
-
-
- repdate: =0/1
-
- Whether to replace missing Dates with blanks.
-
- Do not replace missing Dates
- Replace missing Dates
-
-
-
-
- incsources: =0/1
-
- Whether to include source references.
-
- Do not include sources
- Include sources
-
-
-
-
- incphotos: =0/1
-
- Whether to include images.
-
- Do not include images
- Include images
-
-
-
-
- desref: =0/1
-
- Whether to add descendant references in child list.
-
- Do not add references
- Add references
-
-
-
-
- computeage: =0/1
-
- Whether to compute age.
-
- Do not compute age
- Compute age
-
-
-
-
- fulldates: =0/1
-
- Whether to use full dates instead of just year.
-
- Do not use full dates
- Use full dates
-
-
-
-
- incnames: =0/1
-
- Whether to include other names.
-
- Do not include other names
- Include other names
-
-
-
-
- listc: =0/1
-
- Whether to list children.
-
- Do not list children
- List children
-
-
-
-
- incevents: =0/1
-
- Whether to include events.
-
- Do not include events
- Include events
-
-
-
-
- usenick: =0/1
-
- Whether to use the nick name as the first name.
-
- Do not use nick name
- Use nick name
-
-
-
-
- incnotes: =0/1
-
- Whether to include notes.
-
- Do not include notes
- Include notes
-
-
-
-
- omitda: =0/1
-
- Whether to omit duplicate ancestors.
-
- Do not omit duplicates
- Omit duplicates
-
-
-
-
- repplace: =0/1
-
- Whether to replace missing Places with blanks.
-
- Do not replace missing Places
- Replace missing Places
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Family Group Report
-
-
- name:
-
- family_group
-
-
-
- spouse_id: =ID
-
- Gramps ID of the person's spouse.
- Value: Use show=id to get ID list.
-
-
-
-
-
- Fan Chart
-
-
- name:
-
- fan_chart
-
-
-
-
-
- FTM Style Ancestor Report
-
-
- name:
-
- ftm_ancestor_report
-
-
-
-
-
- FTM Style Descendant Report
-
-
- name:
-
- ftm_descendant_report
-
-
-
-
-
- Relationship Graph
-
-
- name:
-
- rel_graph
-
-
-
- rankdir: =str
-
- Graph direction.
-
- LR Horizontal
- RL Vertical
-
-
-
-
- justyears: =0/1
-
- Whether to use years only.
-
- Do not use years only
- Use years only
-
-
-
-
- latin: =0/1
-
- Needs to be set if font doesn't support unicode.
-
- Supports unicode
- Supports only Latin1
-
-
-
-
- arrow: =str
-
- Arrow styles for heads and tails.
-
- d Descendants <- Ancestors
- a Descendants -> Ancestors
- da Descendants <-> Ancestors
- Descendants - Ancestors
-
-
-
-
- dashedl: =0/1
-
- Whether to use dotted lines for non-birth relationships.
-
- Do not use dotted lines
- Use dotted lines
-
-
-
-
- url: =0/1
-
- Whether to include URLs.
-
- Do not include URLs
- Include URLs
-
-
-
-
- pagesh: =num
-
- Number of pages in horizontal direction.
- Value: Integer values
-
-
-
- placecause: =0/1
-
- Whether to replace missing dates with place/cause.
-
- Do not replace blank dates
- Replace blank dates
-
-
-
-
- gvof: =str
-
- Output format to convert dot file into.
-
- ps Postscript
- svg Structured Vector Graphics (SVG)
- svgz Compressed Structured Vector Graphics (SVG)
- png PNG image
- jpg JPEG image
- gif GIF image
-
-
-
-
- color: =str
-
- Whether and how to colorize graph.
-
- outline B&W Outline
- colored Colored outline
- filled Color fill
-
-
-
-
- incid: =0/1
-
- Whether to include IDs.
-
- Do not include IDs
- Include IDs
-
-
-
-
- incdate: =0/1
-
- Whether to include dates.
-
- Do not include dates
- Include dates
-
-
-
-
- pagesv: =num
-
- Number of pages in vertical direction.
- Value: Integer values
-
-
-
- font: =str
-
- Font to use in the report.
-
- Default
- Helvetica Postscript / Helvetica
- FreeSans Truetype / FreeSans
-
-
-
-
- margin: =num
-
- Margin size.
- Value: Floating point value, in cm
-
-
-
- showfamily: =0/1
-
- Whether to show family nodes.
-
- Do not show family nodes
- Show family nodes
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Relationship Graph
-
-
- name:
-
- rel_graph2
-
-
-
- rankdir: =str
-
- Graph direction.
-
- LR Horizontal
- RL Vertical
-
-
-
-
- justyears: =0/1
-
- Whether to use years only.
-
- Do not use years only
- Use years only
-
-
-
-
- latin: =0/1
-
- Needs to be set if font doesn't support unicode.
-
- Supports unicode
- Supports only Latin1
-
-
-
-
- arrow: =str
-
- Arrow styles for heads and tails.
-
- d Descendants <- Ancestors
- a Descendants -> Ancestors
- da Descendants <-> Ancestors
- Descendants - Ancestors
-
-
-
-
- dashedl: =0/1
-
- Whether to use dotted lines for non-birth relationships.
-
- Do not use dotted lines
- Use dotted lines
-
-
-
-
- url: =0/1
-
- Whether to include URLs.
-
- Do not include URLs
- Include URLs
-
-
-
-
- pagesh: =num
-
- Number of pages in horizontal direction.
- Value: Integer values
-
-
-
- placecause: =0/1
-
- Whether to replace missing dates with place/cause.
-
- Do not replace blank dates
- Replace blank dates
-
-
-
-
- gvof: =str
-
- Output format to convert dot file into.
-
- ps Postscript
- svg Structured Vector Graphics (SVG)
- svgz Compressed Structured Vector Graphics (SVG)
- png PNG image
- jpg JPEG image
- gif GIF image
-
-
-
-
- color: =str
-
- Whether and how to colorize graph.
-
- outline B&W Outline
- colored Colored outline
- filled Color fill
-
-
-
-
- incid: =0/1
-
- Whether to include IDs.
-
- Do not include IDs
- Include IDs
-
-
-
-
- incdate: =0/1
-
- Whether to include dates.
-
- Do not include dates
- Include dates
-
-
-
-
- pagesv: =num
-
- Number of pages in vertical direction.
- Value: Integer values
-
-
-
- font: =str
-
- Font to use in the report.
-
- Default
- Helvetica Postscript / Helvetica
- FreeSans Truetype / FreeSans
-
-
-
-
- margin: =num
-
- Margin size.
- Value: Floating point value, in cm
-
-
-
- showfamily: =0/1
-
- Whether to show family nodes.
-
- Do not show family nodes
- Show family nodes
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Complete Individual Report
-
-
- name:
-
- indiv_complete
-
-
-
- cites: =0/1
-
- Whether to cite sources.
-
- Do not cite sources
- Cite sources
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Individual Summary
-
-
- name:
-
- individual_summary
-
-
-
-
-
- Generate Web Site (deprecated)
-
-
- name:
-
- webpage
-
-
-
- HTMLidurl: =str
-
- URL for links from GRAMPS IDs
- Value: the_url_value
-
-
-
- HTMLext: =str
-
- Extension for generated files
- Value: Any extension you like: html, htm, php, asp, etc.
-
-
-
- HTMLimagedir: =str
-
- Image subdirectory
- Value: image_subdir_name
-
-
-
- HTMLsplita: =0/1
-
- Split alphabetical sections to different pages
-
- Do not split sections
- Split sections
-
-
-
-
- HTMLincpriv: =0/1
-
- Inclusion of people marked private
-
- Do not include
- Include
-
-
-
-
- HTMLincid: =0/1
-
- Include GRAMPS ID in the report
-
- Do not include
- Include
-
-
-
-
- HTMLidxcol: =num
-
- Number of columns in the index page
- Value: Any integer number
-
-
-
- HTMLcmtxtsi: =0/1
-
- Inclusion of comments and text in source information
-
- Do not include
- Include
-
-
-
-
- HTMLlnktoalphabet: =0/1
-
- Include links to alphabetical sections in index page
-
- Do not include
- Include
-
-
-
-
- HTMLgendex: =0/1
-
- Create a GENDEX index
-
- Do not create
- Create
-
-
-
-
- HTMLtreed: =num
-
- Depth of ancestor tree
- Value: Any integer number
-
-
-
- HTMLidxt: =str
-
- Template name for the index page
- Value: /full/path/to/the/tpkg
-
-
-
- HTMLlinktidx: =0/1
-
- Include links to the index page
-
- Do not include
- Include
-
-
-
-
- HTMLrestrictinfo: =0/1
-
- Restrict information on living people
-
- Do not restrict
- Restrict
-
-
-
-
- HTMLyearso: =0/1
-
- Use only birth year on the index page
-
- Use full date
- Use just year
-
-
-
-
- HTMLidxbirth: =0/1
-
- Append birth dates to the names on the index page
-
- Do not append
- Append
-
-
-
-
- HTMLshorttree: =0/1
-
- Include short ancestor tree
-
- Do not include
- Include
-
-
-
-
- HTMLimg: =num
-
- Inclusion of images
-
- No images at all
- No images for living people
- Images for all people
-
-
-
-
- HTMLod: =str
-
- Output directory for the web site
- Value: /full/name/of/the/dir
-
-
-
- HTMLplaceidx: =0/1
-
- Create an index of all Places
-
- Do not create
- Create
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Book Report
-
-
- name:
-
- book
-
-
-
- bookname: =name
-
- Name of the book. MANDATORY
-
-
-
-
-
- Descendant Wall Chart
-
-
- name:
-
- descend_chart2
-
-
-
- singlep: =0/1
-
- Whether to scale to fit on a single page.
-
- Do not scale to fit
- Scale to fit
-
-
-
-
- title: =str
-
- Title string for the report
- Value: Whatever String You Wish
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Tools
-
- Common Options
-
-
- filter: =num
-
- Filter number.
-
-
-
- id: =ID
-
- Gramps ID of a central person.
-
-
-
-
-
- Rename personal event types
-
-
- name:
-
- chtype
-
-
-
- fromtype: =str
-
- Type of events to replace
- Value: Event type string
-
-
-
- totype: =str
-
- New type replacing the old one
- Value: Event type string
-
-
-
-
-
- Check and repair database
-
-
- name:
-
- check
-
-
-
-
-
- Reorder GRAMPS IDs
-
-
- name:
-
- reorder_ids
-
-
-
-
-
- Verify the database
-
-
- name:
-
- verify
-
-
-
- lngwdw: =num
-
- Maximum number of consecutive years of widowhood
- Value: Number of years
-
-
-
- mxchildmom: =num
-
- Maximum number of children for a woman
- Value: Number of children
-
-
-
- wedder: =num
-
- Maximum number of spouses for a person
- Value: Number of spouses
-
-
-
- mxchilddad: =num
-
- Maximum number of children for a man
- Value: Number of chidlren
-
-
-
- estimate_age: =0/1
-
- Whether to estimate missing dates
-
- Do not estimate
- Estimate dates
-
-
-
-
- yngmar: =num
-
- Minimum age to marry
- Value: Age in years
-
-
-
- oldmar: =num
-
- Maximum age to marry
- Value: Age in years
-
-
-
- cbspan: =num
-
- Maximum span of years for all children
- Value: Span in years
-
-
-
- oldage: =num
-
- Maximum age
- Value: Age in years
-
-
-
- olddad: =num
-
- Maximum age to father a child
- Value: Age in years
-
-
-
- hwdif: =num
-
- Maximum husband-wife age difference
- Value: Age difference in years
-
-
-
- yngmom: =num
-
- Minimum age to bear a child
- Value: Age in years
-
-
-
- yngdad: =num
-
- Minimum age to father a child
- Value: Age in years
-
-
-
- oldmom: =num
-
- Maximum age to bear a child
- Value: Age in years
-
-
-
- cspace: =num
-
- Maximum number of years between children
- Value: Number of years
-
-
-
-
-
- Generate Testcases for persons and families
-
-
- name:
-
- testcasegenerator
-
-
-
- dates: =0/1
-
- Whether to create test for date handling.
-
- Skip test
- Create date tests
-
-
-
-
- person_count: =int
-
- Number of dummy persons to generate
- Value: Number of persons
-
-
-
- no_trans: =0/1
-
- Wheter to use one transaction or multiple small ones
-
- One transaction
- Multiple transactions
-
-
-
-
- long_names: =0/1
-
- Wheter to create short or long names
-
- Short names
- Long names
-
-
-
-
- bugs: =0/1
-
- Whether to create invalid database references.
-
- Skip test
- Create invalid Database references
-
-
-
-
- persons: =0/1
-
- Whether to create a bunch of dummy persons
-
- Dont create persons
- Create dummy persons
-
-
-
-
- add_serial: =0/1
-
- Wheter to add a serial number to every text field
-
- No serial
- Add serial number
-
-
-
-
- specialchars: =0/1
-
- Wheter to ass some special characters to every text field
-
- No special characters
- Add special characters
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Checkpoint the database
-
-
- name:
-
- chkpoint
-
-
-
- crcmd: =str
-
- Custom command line for retrieval
- Value: Custom command string
-
-
-
- cacmd: =str
-
- Custom command line for archiving
- Value: Custom command string
-
-
-
- archive: =0/1
-
- Whether to archive or retrieve.
-
- Retrieve
- Archive
-
-
-
-
- rcs: =0/1
-
- Whether to use RCS (ignores custom commands).
-
- Do not use RCS
- Use RCS
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Rebuild secondary indices
-
-
- name:
-
- rebuild
-
-
-
-
-
- Dumps gender statistics
-
-
- name:
-
- dgenstats
-
-
-
-
-
- Generate Commandline Plugin Reference
-
-
- name:
-
- cmdref
-
-
-
- include: =0/1
-
- Whether to include into the manual
-
- Do not include
- Include
-
-
-
-
- target: =str
-
- Pathname to the target file
- Value: Any valid pathname
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/gramps2/help/C/custom.xml b/gramps2/help/C/custom.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index 7582c1874..000000000
--- a/gramps2/help/C/custom.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,291 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Settings
-
-
- Preferences
-
- Most of the settings in &app;, are configured in the
- Preferences dialog. To invoke it, choose
- Edit
- Preferences....
-
-
-
- Preferences dialog
-
-
- Shows Preferences dialog.
-
-
-
- The pane on the left displays the tree of available option
- categories. Selecting a tree node will display the corresponding
- options in the right side of the dialog.
-
-
- Database
- This category contains preferences relevant to the
- database itself. It has the following subcategories:
-
-
- General
-
-
- Automatically
- load last database
- Check this box to automatically load the
- last open database on startup.
-
-
- Family name guessing
- This option affects the initial family name of a
- child when he/she is added to the database.
-
- This option only
- affects the initial family name guessed by &app; when the
- Edit Person dialog is launched. You can modify
- that name the way you see fit. Set this option to the value that you
- will most frequently use, as it will save you a lot of
- typing.
-
- If None is selected, no guessing will be
- attempted. Selecting Father's surname will use
- the family name of the father. Selecting Combination of
- mother's and father's surname will use the father's name
- followed by the mother's name. Finally, Icelandic
- style will use the father's given name followed by the
- "sson" suffix (e.g. the son of Edwin will be guessed as
- Edwinsson).
-
-
-
-
-
-
- GRAMPS IDs
- Enter ID prefixes for various kinds of database
- entries into the corresponding text entry fields.
-
-
- The ID prefixes use formatting conventions common for
- C, Python, and other programming languages. For example, the %04d
- expands to an integer, prepended with zeros to have the total
- width of four digits. If you would like IDs to be 1, 2, 3, etc,
- simply set the formatting parameter to %d.
-
-
-
-
- Researcher Information
- Enter your personal information in the corresponding
- text entry fields. Although &app; requests information about you,
- this information is used only so that &app; can create valid GEDCOM
- output files. A valid GEDCOM file requires information about the file's
- creator. If you choose, you may leave the information empty, however
- none of your exported GEDCOM files will be valid.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Display
- This category contains preferences relevant to
- displaying database records and controls in &app;.
- It has the following subcategories:
-
-
-
- General
-
-
-
-
- Default view
- This determines which view will appear when
- you start &app;. Choose between Person and Family views.
-
-
-
- Family view style
- This selects between the two available styles
- of the Family view layout. The Left to right
- style is similar to the Family Tree Maker (tm), while the
- Top to bottom is similar to the Reunion.
-
-
-
- Always display the LDS ordinance
- tabs
- Check this box to have LDS ordinance tabs
- displayed. If you do not know what LDS is then you probably
- should not check it.
-
- Display Tip of the
- Day
- Check this box to have the Tip
- of the Day dialog appear on every startup.
- The tips are displayed randomly from the large collection
- of information bits on &app;.
-
-
- The Tip of the Day is likely
- to be useful for new user of &app;.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Dates
-
-
- Select the display format for the dates
- from the available formats listed in this menu.
-
-
- Available date display formats are language-specific.
- Depending on whether or not there is a &app; date displayer
- available for your language, you may or may not have a lot of
- choices.
-
-
-
-
-
- Toolbar and Statusbar
-
-
-
-
- Toolbar
- Select the desired appearance of the toolbar
- icons from the menu. Selecting GNOME
- Settings will use the overall settings selected
- for your GNOME desktop.
-
-
-
- Statusbar
- Select the desired contents displayed in the
- statusbar using the radio buttons.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Other settings
-
- Besides Preferences dialog, there are
- other settings available in &app;. For various reasons they have been
- made more readily accessible, as listed below.
-
-
-
- Column Editor
-
- The columns of the list views may be added, removed, or reordered
- in a Column Editor Dialog,
- see . Only checked columns will
- be shown in the view. To change their order, drag any column to its desired place inside
- the editor. Clicking OK will reflect the changes
- in the appropriate view. To invoke Column Editor Dialog,
- choose EditColumn
- Editor....
-
-
-
- The Column Editor is available
- and works in the same way for all list views.
- Specifically, it is available for People View, Family View (children list).
- Sources View, Places View, and Media View.
-
-
-
-
- Setting Home person
- The Home person is the person who becomes active
- when database opened, when Home button is clicked
- or the Home menu item is selected from
- either Go menu or the right-click context menu
- anywhere.
-
- To set Home person, make the desired person active and
- then choose EditSet Home
- person....
-
-
-
-
- Adjusting viewing controls
- Whether the toolbar, the sidebar, or the filter (People View
- only) are displayed in the main window is adjusted through
- the View menu.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Advanced manipulation of settings
-
- The contents of this section is outside the scope
- of interest of a general user of &app;. If you proceed with tweaking
- the options on the low level you may damage your &app; installation.
- Be careful. YOU HAVE BEEN WARNED!
-
-
- By default, &app; stores its settings using gconf2 system.
- All the settings used in this version of &app; are stored in
- subdirectories under /apps/gramps/ in the
- gconf2 namespace. Accessing the keys can be done either using
- gconftool-2 command line tool, or the
- gconf-editor GUI tool.
-
-
- All keys are documented, and the notification mechanisms
- are used as appropriate. Therefore, updating keys from outside
- of &app; should lead to updating &app; in real time, without
- necessarily restarting it.
-
-
-
diff --git a/gramps2/help/C/faq.xml b/gramps2/help/C/faq.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index 8934f9fc9..000000000
--- a/gramps2/help/C/faq.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,466 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
- Frequently Asked Questions
-
-
- This appendix contains the list of questions that frequently come
- up in mailing list discussions and forums. This list is by no
- means complete. If you would like to add questions/answers to this
- list, please email your suggestions to gramps-devel@lists.sf.net
-
-
-
-
-
- What is &app;?
-
-
- &app; is the Genealogical Research and Analysis Management
- Program System. In other words, it is a personal genealogy
- program letting you store, edit, and research genealogical
- data using the powers of your computer.
-
-
-
-
-
- Where do I get it and how much does it cost?
-
-
- &app; can be downloaded from http://sf.net/projects/gramps at no
- charge. &app; is an Open Source project covered by the GNU
- General Public License. You have full access to the source
- code and are allowed to distribute the program and source
- code freely.
-
-
-
-
-
- Does it work with Windows (tm)?
-
-
- No. &app; uses the GTK and GNOME libraries. While the GTK
- libraries have been ported to Windows, the GNOME libraries
- have not. This, however, may change in the future.
-
-
-
-
-
- Does it work with the Mac?
-
-
-
- The Fink project has ported
- some older versions of
- &app; to OSX (tm). The Mac OSX port is not directly supported by
- the &app; project, primarily because none of the &app; developers
- have access to Mac OSX and because OSX is not Free Software.
-
- This version of &app; (&appversion;) does not appear to have been
- ported by the Fink project. Please contact the Fink project for
- more information.
-
- Some people have had success using the DarwinPorts instead of the
- Fink project.
-
-
-
-
-
- Does it work with KDE?
-
-
- Yes, as long as the required GNOME libraries are installed.
-
-
-
-
-
- Do I really have to have GNOME installed?
-
-
- Yes, but you do not have to be running the GNOME desktop.
-
-
-
-
-
- What version of GNOME do I need?
-
-
- This version of gramps requires GNOME 2.8.0 or higher.
- Previous versions in 1.0.x series required GNOME 2.0.
-
-
-
-
-
- Is &app; compatible with other genealogical software?
-
-
- &app; makes every effort to maintain compatibility with
- GEDCOM, the general standard of recording genealogical
- information. We have import and export filters that enable
- &app; to read and write GEDCOM files.
-
- It is important to understand that the GEDCOM standard is
- poorly implemented -- virtually every genealogical software
- has its own "flavor" of GEDCOM. As we learn about new
- flavor, the import/export filters can be created very
- quickly. However, finding out about the unknown flavors
- requires user feedback. Please feel free to inform us about
- any GEDCOM flavor not supported by &app;, and we will do our
- best to support it!
-
-
-
-
-
- Can &app; read files created by other genealogy programs?
-
- See above.
-
-
-
-
- Can &app; write files readable by other genealogy programs?
-
- See above.
-
-
-
-
- Can &app; print a genealogical tree for my family?
-
-
- Yes. Different people have different ideas of what a
- genealogical tree is. Some think of it as a chart going
- from the distant ancestor and listing all his/her
- descendants and their families. Others think it should be a
- chart going from the person back in time, listing the
- ancestors and their families. Yet other people think of a
- table, text report, etc.
-
- &app; can produce any of the above, and many more different
- charts and reports. Moreover, the plugin architecture
- enables users (you) to create their own plugins which could
- be new reports, charts, or research tools.
-
-
-
-
-
- In what formats can &app; output its reports?
-
-
- Text reports are available in HTML, PDF, AbiWord, KWord,
- LaTeX, RTF, and OpenOffice formats. Graphical reports
- (charts and diagrams) are available in PostScript, PDF, SVG,
- OpenOffice, and GraphViz formats.
-
-
-
-
-
- Is &app; compatible with the Internet?
-
-
- &app; can store web addresses and direct your browser to
- them. It can import data that you download from the
- Internet. It can export data that you could send over the
- Internet. &app; is familiar with the standard file formats
- widely used on the Internet (e.g. JPEG, PNG, and GIF images,
- MP3, OGG, and WAV sound files, QuickTime, MPEG, and AVI
- movie files, etc). Other than that, there is little that a
- genealogical program can do with the Internet.
-
-
-
-
-
- Can I create custom reports/filters/whatever?
-
-
- Yes. There are many levels of customization. One is creating
- or modifying the templates used for the reports. This gives
- you some control over the fonts, colors, and some layout of
- the reports. You can also use &app; controls in the report
- dialogs to tell what contents should be used for a
- particular report. In addition to this, you have an ability
- to create your own filters -- this is useful in selecting
- people based on criteria set by you. You can combine these
- filters to create new, more complex filters. Finally, you
- have an option to create your own plugins. These may be new
- reports, research tools, import/export filters, etc. This
- assumes some knowledge of programming in Python.
-
-
-
-
-
- What standards does &app; support?
-
-
- The nice thing about standards is that there never is a
- shortage of them. &app; is tested to support the following
- flavors of GEDCOM: GEDCOM5.5, Brother's Keeper, Family
- Origins, Family Tree Maker, Ftree, GeneWeb, Legacy, Personal
- Ancestral File, Pro-Gen, Reunion, and Visual Genealogie.
-
-
-
-
-
- What is the maximum database size (bytes) &app; can handle?
-
-
- &app; has no hard limits on the size of a database that it
- can handle. Starting with this release, &app; no longer
- loads all data into memory, which allows it to work with a
- much larger database than before. In reality, however,
- there are practical limits. The main limiting factors are
- the available memory on the system and the cache size used
- for BSDDB database access. With common memory sizes these
- days, &app; should have no problem using databases with tens
- of thousands of people.
-
-
-
-
-
- How many people can &app; database handle?
-
-
- We have found that on a typical system, &app; tends to bog
- down after the database has around 150,000 people. Again,
- this is dependent on how much memory you have.
-
-
-
-
-
- Why is &app; running so slowly?
-
-
- It does not anymore! Just try out the current
- version, &appversion;.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- My database is really big. Is there a way around loading
- all the data into memory?
-
-
-
- Starting with this release, &app; no longer loads all data
- into memory, which allows it to work with a much larger
- database than before.
-
-
-
-
-
- I want to rerun the Startup dialog. How do I do this?
-
-
- &app; keeps a flag in the GNOME configuration database to
- indicate that the startup dialog has been run. To cause
- &app; to rerun this, the flag needs to be reset. This can be
- done with the following command:
-
-
- gconftool-2 -u /apps/gramps/behavior/startup
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Why are non-latin characters displayed as garbage in PDF/PS
- reports?
-
-
-
- This is a limitation of the builtin fonts of PS and PDF
- formats. To print non-latin text, use the Print... in the
- format selection menu of the report dialog. This will use
- the gnome-print backend, which supports PS and PDF creation,
- as well as direct printing.
-
-
- If you only have latin text, the PDF option will produce a
- smalled PDF compared to that created by gnome-print, simply
- because no font information will be embedded.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Why can I not add/remove/edit columns to the lists in People
- View and Family View?
-
-
-
- Now you can! Just try out the current version, &appversion;.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- I would like to contribute to &app; by writing my favorite
- report. How do I do that?
-
-
-
- The easiest way to contribute to reports, filters, tools,
- etc. is to copy an existing &app; report, filter, or
- tool. If you can create what you want by modifying existing
- code -- great! If your idea does not fit into the logic of
- any existing &app; tool, the following page may provide some help in
- writing your own plugin from scratch.
-
-
- If you need more help or would like to discuss your idea
- with us, please do not hesitate to contact us at gramps-devel@lists.sf.net
-
-
- To test your work in progress, you may save your plugin
- under $HOME/.gramps/plugins
- directory and it should be found and imported on startup.
- The correctly written plugin will register itself with
- &app;, create menu item, and so on.
-
-
- If you are happy with your plugin and would like to
- contribute your code back to the &app; project, you are very
- welcome to do so by contacting us at gramps-devel@lists.sf.net
-
-
-
-
-
-
- I found a bug and I want it fixed right now! What do I do?
-
-
-
- The best thing you can do is to fix the bug and send the
- patch to gramps-devel@lists.sf.net :-)
-
- A good bug report would include:
-
-
-
- Version of gramps you were using when you encountered
- the bug (available through
- Help
- About menu
- item).
-
-
-
-
- Language under which gramps was run (available by executing
-
- echo $LANG
- in your terminal).
-
-
- Symptoms indicating that this is indeed a bug.
-
-
-
- Any Traceback messages, error messages, warnings, etc,
- that showed up in your terminal or a in separate
- traceback window.
-
-
-
-
- Most problems can be fixed quickly provided there is enough
- information. To ensure this, please follow up on your bug
- reports. In particular, if you file a bug report with sf.net
- bug tracker, PLEASE log in to sf.net before filing (register
- your free account if you don't have one). Then we will have
- a way of contacting you should we need more information. If
- you choose to file your report anonymously, at least check
- every so often whether your report page has something new
- posted, as it probably would.
-
-
- If the above explanations seem vague, please follow this link.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- It is obvious that &app; absolutely needs to become a
- (client-server/web-based/PHP/weblog/Javascript/C++/distributed/KDE/Motif/Tcl/Win32/C#/You-name-it)
- application. When is this going to happen?
-
-
-
- The surest way to see it happen is to get it done by
- yourself. Since &app; is free/open source, nobody prevents
- you from taking all of the code and continuing its
- development in whatever direction you see fit. In doing so,
- you may consider giving your new project another name to
- avoid confusion with the continuing &app; development. If
- you would like the &app; project to provide advice,
- expertise, filters, etc., we will gladly cooperate with your
- new project, to ensure compatibility or import/export
- options to your new format of a project.
-
-
- If, however, you would like the &app; project to to adopt
- your strategy, you would need to convince &app; developers
- that your strategy is good for &app; and superior to the
- present development strategy.
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/gramps2/help/C/filtref.xml b/gramps2/help/C/filtref.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index aef304538..000000000
--- a/gramps2/help/C/filtref.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,499 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Filter rules reference
- This appendix lists of all the filter rules currently defined
- in &app;. Each of these rules is available for use when creating custom
- filters, see . The rules are
- listed by their categories.
-
-
-
-
- General filters
- This category includes the following most general rules:
-
-
-
- Has complete record
- This rule matches all people whose records are
- marked as complete. Currently, the completeness of personal
- information is marked manually, in the Edit Person
- dialog.
-
-
-
- People with incomplete names
- This rule matches all people with either
- given name or family name missing.
-
-
-
- Is bookmarked person
- This rule matches all people who are on the
- bookmark list.
-
-
-
- Has text matching substring of
- This rule matches all people whose records contain
- specified substring. All textual records are searched. Optionally,
- the search can be made case sensitive, or a regular expression
- match.
-
-
-
- Everyone
- This rule matches any person in the database.
- As such it is not very useful on its own except for testing purposes.
- However, it may be useful in combinations with other rules.
-
-
-
- People probably alive
- This rule matches all people whose records do
- not indicate their death and who are not unreasonably old,
- judging by their available birth data and today's date.
-
-
-
- Has a name
- This rule matches any person whose name
- matches the specified value in full or in part. For example,
- Marta Ericsdotter will be matched by the rule using the
- value "eric" for the family name.
-
-
- Separate values can be used for Given name, Family name,
- Suffix, and the Title. The rule returns a match if, and only if,
- all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's
- name. To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
-
-
-
- Has the Id
- This rule matches any person with a specified
- &app; ID. The rule returns a match only if the ID is matched
- exactly.
-
-
- You can either enter the ID into a text entry field, or
- select a person from the list by clicking
- Select... button. In the latter case, the
- ID will appear in the text field after the selection was made.
-
-
-
- Is default person
- This rule matches the default (home) person.
-
-
-
- People marked private
- This rule matches people whose records are marked
- as private.
-
-
-
- Is a female
- This rule matches any female person.
-
-
-
- People who have images
- This rule matches people with images in their
- galleries.
-
-
-
- People without a birth date
- This rule matches people missing birth date.
-
-
-
- Is a male
- This rule matches any male person.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Event filters
- This category includes the following rules that match people
- based on their recorded events:
-
-
- Has the birth
- This rule matches people whose birth event
- matches specified values for Date, Place, and Description.
- The rule returns a match even if the person's birth event matches
- the value partially. The matching rules are case-insensitive.
- For example, anyone born in Sweden will be matched by the rule
- using the value "sw" for the Place.
-
-
- The rule returns a match if, and only if,
- all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's
- birth. To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
-
-
-
- Has the death
- This rule matches people whose death event
- matches specified values for Date, Place, and Description.
- The rule returns a match even if the person's death event
- matches the value partially. The matching rules are case-insensitive.
- For example, anyone who died in Sweden
- will be matched by the rule using the value "sw" for the Place.
-
-
- The rule returns a match if, and only if,
- all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's
- death. To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
-
-
-
- Has source of
- This rule matches people whose records refer
- to the specified source.
-
-
-
- Has the personal event
- This rule matches people that have a personal
- event matching specified values for the Event type, Date, Place,
- and Description. The rule returns a match even if the person's
- event matches the value partially. The matching rules are
- case-insensitive. For example, anyone who graduated
- in Sweden will be matched by the rule using the Graduation event
- and the value "sw" for the Place.
-
-
- The personal events should be selected from a pull-down menu.
- The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty values
- are (partially) matched by the personal event.
- To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
-
-
-
- Has the family event
- This rule matches people that have a family
- event matching specified values for the Event type, Date, Place,
- and Description. The rule returns a match even if the person's
- event matches the value partially. The matching rules are
- case-insensitive. For example, anyone who was married in Sweden
- will be matched by the rule using the Marriage event and the
- value "sw" for the Place.
-
-
- The family events should be selected from a pull-down menu.
- The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty values
- are (partially) matched by the personal event.
- To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
-
-
-
- Witness
- This rule matches people who are present as
- a witness in the event. If the personal or family event type is
- specified, only the events of this type will be searched.
-
-
-
- People with incomplete events
- This rule matches people missing date or place in
- any personal event.
-
-
-
- Families with incomplete events
- This rule matches people missing date or place in
- any family event of any of their families.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Family filters
- This category includes the following rules that match people
- based on their family relationships:
-
-
- People with children
- This rule matches people with children.
-
-
-
- People with multiple marriage records
- This rule matches people with more than one spouse.
-
-
-
- People with no marriage records
- This rule matches people with no spouses.
-
-
-
- People who were adopted
- This rule matches adopted people.
-
-
-
- Has the relationships
- This rule matches people with a particular
- relationship. The relationship must match the type selected from
- the menu. Optionally, the number of relationships and the number
- of children can be specified.
-
-
- The rule returns a match if, and only if,
- all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's
- relationship. To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
-
-
-
- Is spouse of filter match
- This rule matches people married to someone
- who is matched by the specified filter.
- The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
-
-
-
- Is a child of filter match
- This rule matches people for whom either parent
- is matched by the specified filter.
- The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
-
-
-
- Is a parent of filter match
- This rule matches people whose child
- is matched by the specified filter.
- The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
-
-
-
- Is a sibling of filter match
- This rule matches people whose sibling
- is matched by the specified filter.
- The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Ancestral filters
- This category includes the following rules that match people
- based on their ancestral relations to other people:
-
-
- Is an ancestor of
- This rule matches people who are ancestors of the
- specified person. The Inclusive option determines whether the
- specified person should be considered his/her own ancestor (useful
- for building reports).
-
-
- You can either enter the ID into a text entry field, or
- select a person from the list by clicking
- Select... button. In the latter case, the
- ID will appear in the text field after the selection was made.
-
-
-
- Is an ancestor of person at
- least N generations away
- This rule matches people who are ancestors of the
- specified person and are at least N generations away from that person
- in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value of 2
- for the number of generations will match grandparents,
- great-grandparents, etc., but not the parents of the specified
- person.
-
-
-
- Is an ancestor of person not more
- than N generations away
- This rule matches people who are ancestors of the
- specified person and are no more than N generations away from that
- person in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value
- of 2 for the number of generations will match parents and
- grandparents, but not great-grandparents, etc., of the specified
- person.
-
-
-
- Has a common ancestor with
- This rule matches people who have common ancestors
- with the specified person.
-
-
-
- Has a common ancestor with filter match
- This rule matches people who have common ancestors
- with someone who is matched by the specified filter.
- The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
-
-
-
- Is an ancestor of filter match
- This rule matches people who are ancestors
- of someone who is matched by the specified filter.
- The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Descendant filters
- This category includes the following rules that match people
- based on their descendant relations to other people:
-
-
- Is a descendant of
- This rule matches people who are descendants of the
- specified person. The Inclusive option determines whether the
- specified person should be considered his/her own descendant (useful
- for building reports).
-
-
- You can either enter the ID into a text entry field, or
- select a person from the list by clicking
- Select... button. In the latter case, the
- ID will appear in the text field after the selection was made.
-
-
-
- Is a descendant of person at
- least N generations away
- This rule matches people who are descendants of the
- specified person and are at least N generations away from that person
- in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value of 2
- for the number of generations will match grandchildren,
- great-grandchildren, etc., but not the children of the specified
- person.
-
-
-
- Is a descendant of person not more
- than N generations away
- This rule matches people who are descendants of the
- specified person and are no more than N generations away from that
- person in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value
- of 2 for the number of generations will match children and
- grandchildren, but not great-grandchildren, etc., of the specified
- person.
-
-
-
- Is a descendant of filter match
- This rule matches people who are descendants
- of someone who is matched by the specified filter.
- The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
-
-
-
- Is a descendant family member of
- This rule not only matches people who are
- descendants of the specified person, but also those descendants'
- spouses.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Relationship filters
- This category includes the following rules that match people
- based on their mutual relationship:
-
-
- Relationship path between two people
- This rule matches all ancestors of both people
- back to their common ancestors (if exist). This produces the
- "relationship path" between these two people, through
- their common ancestors.
-
-
- You can either enter the ID of each person into the
- appropriate text entry fields, or select people from the list by
- clicking their Select... buttons. In the
- latter case, the ID will appear in the text field after the
- selection was made.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Miscellaneous filters
- This category includes the following rules which do not
- naturally fit into any of the above categories:
-
-
- Has the personal attribute
- This rule matches people who have the personal
- attribute of the specified value. The specified personal attribute
- name should be selected from the menu. The specified value should
- be typed into the text entry field.
-
-
-
- Has the family attribute
- This rule matches people who have the family
- attribute of the specified value. The specified family attribute
- should be selected from the menu. The specified value should be
- typed into the text entry field.
-
-
-
- Matches the filter named
- This rule matches people who are matched
- by the specified filter.
- The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/gramps2/help/C/getstart.xml b/gramps2/help/C/getstart.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index eae3e09b0..000000000
--- a/gramps2/help/C/getstart.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,266 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Getting Started
-
-
- In this chapter, we'll begin with the basics. We'll show you how
- to start &app; and how to get help when you need it.
-
-
-
-
-
- To Start GRAMPS
-
- You can start &app; in the following ways:
-
-
-
- From the Applications menu
-
-
- Select &app; from the list of programs displayed in
- your computer's Applications menu. (The location and
- appearance of this menu vary slightly from one distribution
- of Linux to another. On the default GNOME desktop, you'll
- find &app; in the
- ApplicationsOther
- menu.
-
-
-
-
-
- From the command line
-
-
- If you're adept with Linux and like to work from the command
- line, you can start &app; by calling up a terminal window,
- typing gramps, and then pressing
- Enter.
-
-
- If you would like GRAMPS to open a specific database or to
- import a specific file on startup, you can supply the filename
- as a command line argument:
-
-
- gramps filename.grdb
-
-
- where filename.grdb is the name of
- the file you want to open. The command line provides many
- more ways to start &app; and perform different tasks. The
- detailed reference to the command line options is found
- in .
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Running GRAMPS for the first time
-
- The first time you run the program, GRAMPS will display the
- "Getting Started" dialogs. Follow the directions that
- guide you through Researcher information,
- Numerical date formats, Alternate
- calendar support, and the LDS
- extensions sections. You should find them to be
- self-explanatory.
-
-
-
- Dialog boxes
- We'll make frequent reference in this manual to
- dialogs. A dialog is simply a pop-up window into which you can
- enter information.
-
-
- We recommend you enter your personal information when GRAMPS
- prompts you for it. GRAMPS uses this information strictly so it
- can create valid GEDCOM output files (which require information
- about the files' creator). If you wish, you can choose not to
- supply this information, but be aware that unless and until you
- do, any GEDCOM files you export will not be valid.
-
-
-
-
- GRAMPS Getting Started Window: Researcher Information
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Researcher Information Window.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Entering personal information
- This information can be entered at any time in the
- Preferences dialog, under the Database/Researcher Information
- category.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Choosing a database on startup
-
- If &app; is started without a database selected, the following
- window will appear prompting you to choose one to open.
-
-
-
-
-
- Open Database Window
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Open Database Window.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To open a database that you have recently opened, choose the
- top selection, select your database from the menu and
- click OK.
-
- To open an existing database you have not recently opened,
- choose the middle selection and click
- OK. &app; will then ask you to specify the
- name of the database you wish to open.
-
- As you might guess, to create a new database, choose
- "Create a new database"
-
-
- Selecting file
-
- If you're familiar with version 1.0.X of GRAMPS, you'll note
- that version 2.0 does not require you to select a directory in
- which to store the database.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Obtaining Help
-
- GRAMPS has a Help menu
- that you can consult at any time. It includes the following items:
-
-
-
-
-
- User manual
-
-
- An electronic version of the manual that you can access while you work in GRAMPS.
-
-
-
-
-
- FAQ
-
- A list of Frequently Asked Questions about &app;.
-
-
-
-
- GRAMPS home page
-
- A link to the GRAMPS' project web site.
-
-
-
-
- GRAMPS mailing lists
-
-
- Gives you direct access to GRAMPS' mailing list archives.
-
-
-
-
-
- Report a bug
-
-
- Choose this item to file a bug report in our bug tracking
- system. (Remember, &app; is a living project. We want to
- know about any problems you encounter so we can work to
- solve them for everyone's benefit.)
-
-
-
-
-
- Show plugin status
-
-
- Use this item to display the status of any plugins you may have added.
-
-
-
-
-
- Open example database
-
-
- Select this item to load the example database that is
- included in your GRAMPS package. This database is composed
- of fictitious people and serves as a useful example for
- learning how to work with GRAMPS.
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/gramps2/help/C/keybind.xml b/gramps2/help/C/keybind.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index f79aab30c..000000000
--- a/gramps2/help/C/keybind.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,271 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Keybindings reference
- Most of the standard menu items define equivalent keybindings.
- These are apparent because they are displayed on the right of
- the menu item. However, some keybindings are not associated with
- any items in the menu.
-
- This appendix contains the list of keybindings that are not
- displayed in menus of &app;.
-
-
-
- List Views
- The following bindings are available in all list views:
- People View, Sources View, Places View, and Media View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Key
- Function
-
-
-
-
- Enter
- Invoke Edit Person dialog
- with the selected person.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Family View
- The bindings available in the Family View depend on where the
- focus is. The following tables list the bindings for all focus
- targets.
-
-
-
- Focus on the Active Person
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Key
- Function
-
-
-
-
- Enter
- Invoke Edit Person dialog with
- the active person.
-
-
- Ctrl+Down
- or Ctrl+Right
- Swap the Active Person and the selected spouse.
- Use Ctrl+Down in standard Family View and
- Ctrl+Right in alternative Family
- View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Focus on the Spouse box
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Key
- Function
-
-
-
-
- Enter
- Edit relationship between the Active Person and
- the selected spouse.
-
-
- Shift+Enter
- Edit the personal information for the selected
- spouse.
-
-
- Insert
- Add a person from the database to the spouse
- list.
-
-
- Shift+Insert
- Add a new person to the database and to the spouse
- list.
-
-
- Delete
- Delete the selected spouse from the spouse
- list. The spouse is not deleted from the database.
-
-
- Ctrl+Up
- or Ctrl+Left
- Swap the selected spouse and the Active Person.
- Use Ctrl+Up in standard Family View and
- Ctrl+Left in alternative Family
- View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Focus on the Parents box
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Key
- Function
-
-
-
-
- Enter
- Edit relationship between the parents and their
- child (either the Active Person or the selected spouse, depending
- which parents box the focus is in).
-
-
- Insert
- Add a new set of parents from the database to the
- list.
-
-
- Shift+Insert
- Add a new set of parents to the database and to the
- list.
-
-
- Delete
- Delete the selected parents from the list.
- The parents are not deleted from the database.
-
-
- Ctrl+Right
- or Ctrl+Down
- Make the selected parents the active family.
- Use Ctrl+Right in standard Family View and
- Ctrl+Down in alternative Family
- View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Focus on the Children box
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Key
- Function
-
-
-
-
- Enter
- Edit relationship between the child and his/her
- parents (the Active Person and the selected
- spouse).
-
-
- Shift+Enter
- Edit the personal information for the selected
- child.
-
-
- Insert
- Add a new person from the database to the children
- list.
-
-
- Shift+Insert
- Add a new person to the database and to the children
- list.
-
-
- Delete
- Delete the selected child from the list.
- The child is not deleted from the database.
-
-
- Ctrl+Left
- or Ctrl+Up
- Make the selected child the Active Person.
- Use Ctrl+Left in standard Family View and
- Ctrl+Up in alternative Family
- View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/gramps2/help/C/legal.xml b/gramps2/help/C/legal.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index d13444c20..000000000
--- a/gramps2/help/C/legal.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-
-
- This manual is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
- it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
- the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
- (at your option) any later version.
-
-
-
- This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
- but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
- MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
- GNU General Public License for more details.
-
-
-
- You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
- along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
- Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
-
-
diff --git a/gramps2/help/C/mainwin.xml b/gramps2/help/C/mainwin.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index f51cef564..000000000
--- a/gramps2/help/C/mainwin.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,856 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Main Window
-
-
- When you open a database (either existing or new), the
- following window is displayed:
-
-
-
-
-
- GRAMPS Main Window
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The main &app; window contains the following elements:
-
-
-
-
-
- Menubar
-
-
- The menubar is located at the very top of the window (right
- below the window title) and provides access to all the features
- of &app;.
-
-
-
-
-
- Toolbar
-
-
- The toolbar is located right below the menubar. It gives you
- access to the most frequently used
- functions of &app;. You can set options that control how it
- appears by going to
- EditPreferences. You can also hide it entirely by going to ViewToolbar.
-
-
-
-
-
- Progress Bar
-
-
- The Progress Bar is located in the lower left corner of the
- &app; window. It displays the progress of time consuming
- operations, such as opening and saving large data bases,
- importing and exporting to other formats, generating web
- sites, etc. When you are not doing these types of operations,
- the Progress Bar is blank.
-
-
-
-
-
- Status Bar
-
-
- The Status Bar is located to the right of the Progress Bar,
- on the very bottom of the &app; window. It displays
- information about current &app; activity and contextual
- information about the selected items. The behavior of the
- Status Bar can be adjusted in the Preferences dialog, which
- can be found by selecting
- EditPreferences.
-
-
-
-
-
- Display area
-
-
- The largest area in the center of the &app; window is the
- display area. What it displays depends on the currently
- selected View. We'll discuss Views in detail below.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Views
-
- Genealogical information is very broad and can be extremely
- detailed. Displaying it poses a challenge that GRAMPS takes on by
- dividing and organizing the information into a series of
- Views. Each View displays a portion of the total information,
- selected according to a particular category. This will become
- clearer as we explore the six different Views, listed
- below:
-
-
- People View
- Family View
- Pedigree View
- Sources View
- Places View
- Media View
-
-
- Before we launch into a description of each View,
- let's first explain how to switch between Views.
-
-
-
-
- Switching Views and Viewing Modes
-
- As mentioned above there are six different Views. In
- addition, there are two different Viewing Modes. You can tell at
- a glance which Viewing Mode you are in: If you see icons listed
- vertically in a sidebar at the left of the window, you are in
- the Sidebar Viewing Mode. If instead you see a series of
- "notebook tabs" (labeled People, Family, Pedigree, Sources,
- Places, Media) that run horizontally across the window, then you
- are in the Tabbed Viewing Mode. You can switch from one Viewing
- Mode to another by selecting ViewSidebar from the Sidebar menu item.
-
- If you're in the Sidebar Viewing Mode, you can select the View
- you want by clicking one of the sidebar icons.
-
-
-
- Sidebar Viewing Mode
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows sidebar viewing mode.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- If you're in the Tabbed Viewing Mode, you can select the
- View you want by clicking the corresponding notebook tab.
-
-
-
-
- Tabbed Viewing Mode
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows tabbed viewing mode.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- People View
-
- When &app; first opens a database, it displays the
- People View ( and ). This view lists
- all the people stored in the database.
-
-
-
- You'll note that people are grouped according to their family
- names. To the left of each family name is an arrow. Clicking it
- once will reveal the entire list of people sharing that
- name. Clicking the arrow again will "roll up" the
- list and show only the family name.
-
-
-
-
- By default, the People View, displays the following columns:
- Names, &app; ID
- numbers, Gender, and their
- Birth and Death
- dates. You can add or remove columns to and from
- the display by calling up the Column
- Editor dialog
- (EditColumn
- Editor) and checking or unchecking
- the boxes listed. You can also change the position of a column
- in People View by clicking and dragging it to a new position
- in the Editor. Once you have made the changes you want, click
- OK to exit the Editor and see your
- changes in the People View.
-
-
-
-
- Column Editor
-
- The Column Editor is available in all Views and works the
- same way in each.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Column Editor Dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows column editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Filters
-
-
-
- Genealogical databases can contain information on many people,
- families, places, and objects. It's therefore possible for a
- View to contain a long list of data that's difficult to
- work with. &app; gives you a means for controlling this
- condition by allowing you to filter a list to a more
- manageable size.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Filter Controls Displayed
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows filter controls.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- When &app; opens a database, no filtering is in effect. In
- People View, for example, all people in the database are
- listed by default. To filter the list, go to
- ViewFilter
- . This will place a new menu just above the list
- of People. Click on the double arrows of this menu to get a
- pop-up list of all the criteria by which you can filter the
- People listed. Choose a filter (for example, "Males"
- or "People with children") and click
- Apply.
-
-
-
-
- Displaying the filter
-
-
- To reduce screen clutter, the filter menu is hidden by
- default. To display it, go to the
- ViewFilter
- menu. Please understand that even if the
- filter menu is not displayed, filtering may still be in
- effect. (Thus, we say that filtering is persistent.) If you
- are unsure if your list is filtered, bring up the filter
- menu (by going to View
- Filter) and check
- if any filtering is set.
-
-
-
-
-
- Example filter use
-
- To show males only, choose the Males
- filter, then click the Apply
- button. To cancel any filtering, set the filter to
- Entire Database and then click the
- Apply button.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Family View
-
- The Family View displays the family information of a
- selected person that we call the Active person. Specifically,
- it shows his or her closest relationships.
-
-
-
-
-
- Family View
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Family View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The Family View displays the following series of list boxes:
-
-
-
-
- Active person
-
-
- Shows birth and death data for the individual you have
- selected. Double-click inside the box to edit the Active
- person's information. Click on the double arrow to the
- right and the currently selected Spouse will become the
- new Active person.
-
-
-
-
-
- Relationship
-
-
- Displays birth and death data for the Active person's
- Spouse(s).
-
-
- Terminology
-
- In the Family View, we use the term "spouse"
- for sake of simplicity. However, please note that
- "spouse" may in fact be a domestic partner, a
- partner in a civil union, etc.
-
-
-
-
- Double-click a Spouse to edit his or her
- relationship to the Active person. Shift-click (that is,
- hold down the Shift key while you click) a Spouse to edit
- his or her personal information. Click the icon to the
- top right of the Relationship box to add a new person to
- the database and to create a relationship between this
- person and the Active person. Click the middle icon to
- create a relationship between the Active person and
- another person already stored in the database. Click the
- minus (-) button to remove the relationship between the
- currently selected Spouse and the Active person. (Note
- that this does not remove the Spouse from the database.)
-
-
-
-
-
- Active person's parents
-
-
-
- Click the + or
- - buttons to add or remove parents
- of the Active person. Click the right arrow button to make
- the Father the new Active person and the Mother the new
- Spouse.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Spouse's parents
-
-
- This list box functions the same as that of the Active
- person's parents.
-
-
-
-
-
- Children
-
-
-
- Displays the children of the Active person and the
- currently selected Spouse. The list can be ordered however
- you want by clicking on a column heading.
-
-
-
- Note that in addition to columns for Name, ID, Gender,
- Birth Date, and Death Date, there is a column labeled
- Status.1 This column reflects the relationship between the
- child and his parents (Birth, Adoption, etc.).
-
-
-
- As with the other list boxes, the Children list box has
- some associated buttons. Click the left arrow button to
- make the selected Child the Active person. Click the next
- button down to add a new person to the database and to
- make this person a Child of the Active person. Click the
- next button down to select a person from the database and
- to make this person a Child of the Active person. Click
- the lowest button to remove the selected Child from the
- Family (note that this does not remove the Child from the
- database).
-
-
-
- Right Click Menu
-
- Most of the functions described above can also be executed
- by right-clicking your mouse.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The layout of the Family View can be switched from the
- "left-to-right" arrangement shown in to the
- "top-to-bottom" arrangement shown in . This is
- done by going to
- EditPreferences
- and selecting the Display section of
- the dialog that appears.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Alternative Family View
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Alternative Family View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Pedigree View
-
-
-
- The Pedigree View displays a family tree of the Active
- person's ancestors. The Pedigree View shows up to five
- generations, depending on the size of the window. Each person is
- indicated by a box labeled with his or her name. Two lines
- branch from each box. The top one shows the person's father
- and the bottom one the mother. Solid lines represent birth
- relations, while dashed lines represent non-birth relations
- such as adoption, step-parenthood, guardianship, etc.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Pedigree View
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Pedigree View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- If you move your mouse over a box, it expands to show birth
- and death dates. If you move your mouse over a line, the line
- gets highlighted, indicating an active link. Double-click the
- line to make the corresponding ancestor the Active
- person.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Children Menu
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Children Menu in Pedigree View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To the left of the Active person is a left arrow button. If
- the Active person has children, clicking this button expands a
- list of the Active person's children. Selecting one of the
- children makes that child the pctive Person.
-
-
-
- The appearance of the children's names in the menu
- differentiates the "dead ends" of the tree from the
- continuing branches. Children who have children themselves
- appear in the menu in the boldface and italic type, while
- children without children ("dead ends") appear in a
- regular font. If the Active person has only one child, no menu
- will be displayed (since there is only one choice) and the
- child will become the Active person when the arrow button is
- clicked.
-
-
-
- The right-hand side of the window shows two right arrow
- buttons. When the top button is clicked, the Father of the
- Active person becomes the Active person. Clicking the bottom
- button makes the Mother of the Active person the Active
- person.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Personal Context Menu
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Context Menu in Pedigree View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Right-clicking on any person's box in the Pedigree View will
- bring up the "context menu". Among other useful
- items, the context menu has sub-menus listing
- Spouses, Siblings,
- Children, and
- Parents of that
- person. "Greyed-out" sub-menus indicate the absence
- of the data in the appropriate category. Similarly to the
- children menu above, Childrens' and Parents' menus distinguish
- continuing lines from dead ends.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Pedigree View with the Anchor
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Pedigree View with the anchor set.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Pedigree View gives you an additional, advanced way of
- labeling generations. This feature becomes available by
- setting the "anchor" on a selected person. If the
- anchor is set, the generations are labeled as follows:
-
-
-
-
-
- The Anchor Person (and his/her generation) is labeled as
- 0.
-
-
-
-
- The ancestor generations are numbered with positive integers
- (1,2,
- 3,etc.).
-
-
-
-
- The descendant generations are numbered with negative integers
- (-1,-2,
- -3, etc.).
-
-
-
-
- In all cases, the number represents the number of
- generations between the labeled generation and the anchor
- person. In this mode, you can travel along the extensive
- pedigree line and see the number of generations removed
- from the Anchor Person.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To set the anchor, select the person you want as the Active
- person (recall that you can do so in the Pedigree View by
- clicking the line that leads to the person from his or her
- child). Then, while in Pedigree View, right click anywhere in
- the main window. A context menu will appear. Select
- Set anchor and you will see the Active
- person indicated as the anchor in the lower left corner.
- This newly established Anchor Person will remain in effect
- until you right-click again and select Remove
- anchor from the context menu or until a new Active
- person is chosen who is unrelated to the Anchor Person.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources View
-
-
- Sources View lists the sources of certain information stored
- in the database. These can include various documents (birth,
- death, and marriage certificates, etc.), books, films,
- journals, private diaries, - nearly anything that can
- provide genealogical evidence. GRAMPS gives you the option
- to provide a source for each event you record (births,
- deaths, marriages, etc.). The Source View lists the
- Title, ID, and
- Author of the source, as well as any
- Publication information that may be
- associated with it.
-
-
-
- The list of Sources can be sorted in the usual manner, by
- clicking on a column heading. Clicking once sorts in
- ascending order, clicking again sorts in descending
- order. The Column Editor dialog can be
- used to add, remove and rearrange the displayed columns.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources View
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Sources View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Places View
-
-
- The Places View lists the geographical places in which the
- events of the database took place. These could be places of
- birth, death, and marriages of people, as well as their
- home, employment, education addresses, or any other
- conceivable reference to the geographical location. The
- Places View lists the places' Name,
- ID, Church Parish,
- City, County,
- State, and
- Country. All of these columns can be
- used for sorting by the usual sorting rules. The
- Column Editor dialog may be used to
- add, remove and rearrange the displayed columns.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Places View
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Places View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Media View
-
-
-
-
- Media View
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Media View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The Media View is a list of Media Objects used in the
- database. Media Objects are any files that relate somehow
- to the stored genealogical data. Technically, any file can
- be stored as a Media Object. Most frequently, these are
- images, audio files, animation files, etc. The list box on
- the bottom lists the Name,
- ID, Type, and
- Path of the Media Object. The
- Column Editor dialog may be used to
- rearrange the displayed columns, which obey usual sorting
- rules. The top part of the GRAMPS window shows a preview (if
- available) and information about the Media Object.
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/gramps2/help/C/manual.xml b/gramps2/help/C/manual.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index d173477dd..000000000
--- a/gramps2/help/C/manual.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8115 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-]>
-
-
-
-
- GRAMPS Manual V&manrevision;
-
- 2001
- Donald N. Allingham
-
-
- 2003-2005
- Alex Roitman
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- GRAMPS Project
-
-
-
-
- This manual is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
- it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
- the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
- (at your option) any later version.
-
-
-
- This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
- but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
- MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
- GNU General Public License for more details.
-
-
-
- You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
- along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
- Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
-
-
-
-
-
- Alex
- Roitman
-
- GRAMPS Project
- shura@gramps-project.org
-
-
-
- Donald N.
- Allingham
-
- GRAMPS Project
- don@gramps-project.org
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- GRAMPS Manual V&manrevision;
- &date;
-
- Alex Roitman
- shura@gramps-project.org
-
- GRAMPS Project
-
-
-
- GRAMPS Manual V2.5
- February 2004
-
- Alex Roitman
- shura@gramps-project.org
-
- GRAMPS Project
-
-
-
- GRAMPS Manual V2.4
- December 2003
-
- Alex Roitman
- shura@gramps-project.org
-
- GRAMPS Project
-
-
-
- GRAMPS Manual V2.3
- September 2003
-
- Alex Roitman
- shura@gramps-project.org
-
- GRAMPS Project
-
-
-
- GRAMPS Manual V2.2
- July 2003
-
- Alex Roitman
- shura@gramps-project.org
-
- Donald A. Peterson
- dpeterson@sigmaxi.org
-
- GRAMPS Project
-
-
-
- GRAMPS Manual V2.1
- May 2003
-
- Alex Roitman
- shura@gramps-project.org
-
- GRAMPS Project
-
-
-
- GRAMPS Manual V2.0
- April 2003
-
- Alex Roitman
- shura@gramps-project.org
-
- GRAMPS Project
-
-
-
- GRAMPS User Manual V1.1
- 2001
-
- Donald N. Allingham
- don@gramps-project.org
-
- GRAMPS Project
-
-
-
- gramps User Manual V1.0
- 2001
-
- Donald N. Allingham
- don@gramps-project.org
-
- GRAMPS Project
-
-
-
-
-
- This manual describes version &appversion; of GRAMPS.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Preface
-
- GRAMPS is a software package designed for genealogical
- research. Although similar to other genealogical programs, GRAMPS
- offers some unique and powerful features, which we'll discuss
- below.
-
- GRAMPS is a Open Source Software package, which means you
- are free to make copies and distribute it to anyone you like.
- It's developed and maintained by a worldwide team of volunteers
- whose goal is to make GRAMPS powerful, yet easy to use.
-
-
- Why use GRAMPS?
-
- Most genealogy programs allow you to enter information
- about your ancestors and descendants. Typically, they can
- display family relationships through charts, graphs, or
- reports. Some allow you to include pictures or other media. Most
- let you include information about people even if those people
- are not related to the primary family you happen to be
- researching. And they may include features that let you exchange
- data with other programs and print different types of
- reports.
-
- GRAMPS has all these capabilities and more. Notably, it
- allows you to integrate bits and pieces of data as they arise
- from your research and to put them in one place — your
- computer. You can then use your computer to manipulate,
- correlate, and analyze your data, rather than messing with reams
- of paper.
-
-
-
-
- What's new since 1.0.X
-
- If you are new to GRAMPS, it may not be important for you
- to know how GRAMPS version 2.0.0 (the object of this manual)
- differs from previous versions of the software. You may
- therefore elect to skip this section.
-
- However, if you are already familiar with GRAMPS and are
- interested in the new aspects and features of version 2.0.0,
- please read on.
-
-
-
- Berkeley database backend
-
-
- We've adopted the Berkeley database format (BSDDB) as
- the default for GRAMPS. Berkeley is the most widely used
- open source developer database in the world.
-
- This change allowed us to overcome issues of
- performance and memory requirements that beset version
- 1.0.X. With the new back-end, database sizes of up to a
- hundred thousand people no longer present a major
- obstacle.
-
- The default extension for GRAMPS' BSDDB database files
- is grdb. The new format is open and fully documented in the
- developer's API reference distributed with the source code
- of GRAMPS.
-
-
- Preferred format
-
- The preferred and default format for &app; is the
- new BSDDB format.
-
-
- A consequence of the new database back-end is that the
- "saving" function is no longer necessary (or even
- possible). Now, once you approve changes, they are
- immediately applied; this means that clicking
- OK in the Person, Family, Source,
- Place, Media object, or Event editor immediately records
- changes to the database.
-
- In previous versions, you could "quit without
- saving." This option no longer exists per se; however,
- in version 2.0.0, you can achieve the same effect if you
- abandon or "cancel" all changes and then
- quit.
-
- Also, it is now possible to undo recent
- actions.
-
-
-
- Other database back-ends
-
-
- Along with the BSDDB backend, we've incorporated
- "in-memory" database handling for the GRAMPS XML
- and GEDCOM formats. This means you can now open files in
- those two formats and work with their data without having to
- first create a new database and import data into it. Since
- this approach requires GRAMPS to hold all the data in
- memory, it is only useful for small databases (depending on
- available memory size).
-
-
- GEDCOM Editing
-
- Please keep in mind that some information in a
- GEDCOM file may be lost during import into GRAMPS. Simply
- opening and viewing the file will not change it. However,
- if any changes were made and they were not abandoned upon
- exit, exiting GRAMPS will save the data, with the possible
- data loss.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Desktop integration
-
-
- We've improved the way GRAMPS integrates with the GNOME
- desktop interface common to many Linux distributions. All file
- formats recognized by GRAMPS are now registered as mime types;
- each has its own icon and has GRAMPS as its default
- handler. Thus, if you double-click on any file having one of
- these formats, GRAMPS will launch and open the file.
-
- We've also added support for GNOME's "recent
- documents" function and have incorporated this function
- within GRAMPS itself.
-
-
-
-
-
- Interface improvements
-
-
- We've made numerous changes in the interface. Most of
- them are subtle and incremental improvements, and all of them
- cannot be listed here. The most notable are:
-
-
-
- Removal of alphabetical tabs.
-
-
- Ability to add/remove/rearrange columns in list views.
-
-
- Removal of the Save function and addition of Undo.
-
-
- Proper window management.
-
-
- Support for Tip of the Day.
-
-
- Person-dependent context menus (right-click) in
- Pedigree View, listing parents, children, spouses, and
- siblings.
-
-
- Addition of an Export wizard.
-
-
- Built-in Find function in list views.
-
-
- Addition of a Date selector dialog.
-
-
- Name editor enhancements: patronymic names and
- non-default grouping.
-
-
- "Recent document" support (both within GRAMPS and
- GNOME-wide)
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Import and Export
-
- We've added import and export filters for the GeneWeb format.
-
-
-
-
- Reports
-
-
-
- We've added a new report: Statistics Chart.
-
-
- We've changed the overall report framework. All
- reports now remember the options you configure for
- them.
-
-
- It is possible to generate reports from the command
- line, without launching an interactive GRAMPS
- session.
-
-
- The report API is much simpler now, making it easy to
- write custom reports.
-
-
- A single code instance may be used for a standalone
- report, a book item, and a command-line report.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Internationalization
-
- The approach for entering and displaying dates has
- been completely reworked. The new framework allows for a
- deeper localization of displayed dates than was ever
- possible using the translatable strings.
- The internationalization of names has also been
- improved. Names can be grouped under a non-default
- string. Patronymic names are supported, and it is easy to
- program new ways to display names in the manner customary to
- a given culture or language.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Typographical conventions
-
-
- In this book, some words are marked with special typography:
-
-
-
-
- Applications
-
-
-
-
- Commands you type at the command line
-
-
-
-
- Filenames
-
-
-
-
- Replaceable text
-
-
-
-
- Labels for buttons and other
- portions of the graphical interface
-
-
-
-
- Menu selections look like this:
-
- Menu
- Submenu
- Menu Item
-
-
-
-
-
- Buttons you can click
-
-
-
-
- Anything you type in
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The manual also provides assorted bits of additional information in
- tips and notes, as follows.
-
-
- Tip
-
- Tips and bits of extra information will look like
- this.
-
-
-
-
- Note
-
- Notes will look like this.
-
-
-
-
-
- Finally, there are warnings, notifying you where you should be careful:
-
-
- Example Warning
-
- This is what a warning looks like. If there's a chance
- you'll run into trouble, you will be warned beforehand.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Getting Started
-
-
- In this chapter, we'll begin with the basics. We'll show you how
- to start &app; and how to get help when you need it.
-
-
-
- To Start GRAMPS
-
- You can start &app; in the following ways:
-
-
-
- From the Applications menu
-
-
- Select &app; from the list of programs displayed in
- your computer's Applications menu. (The location and
- appearance of this menu vary slightly from one distribution
- of Linux to another. On the default GNOME desktop, you'll
- find &app; in the
- ApplicationsOther
- menu.
-
-
-
-
-
- From the command line
-
-
- If you're adept with Linux and like to work from the command
- line, you can start &app; by calling up a terminal window,
- typing gramps, and then pressing
- Enter.
-
-
- If you would like GRAMPS to open a specific database or to
- import a specific file on startup, you can supply the filename
- as a command line argument:
-
-
- gramps filename.grdb
-
-
- where filename.grdb is the name of
- the file you want to open. The command line provides many
- more ways to start &app; and perform different tasks.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Running GRAMPS for the first time
-
- The first time you run the program, GRAMPS will display the
- "Getting Started" dialogs. Follow the directions that
- guide you through Researcher information,
- Numerical date formats, Alternate
- calendar support, and the LDS
- extensions sections. You should find them to be
- self-explanatory.
-
-
-
- Dialog boxes
- We'll make frequent reference in this manual to
- dialogs. A dialog is simply a pop-up window into which you can
- enter information.
-
-
- We recommend you enter your personal information when GRAMPS
- prompts you for it. GRAMPS uses this information strictly so it
- can create valid GEDCOM output files (which require information
- about the files' creator). If you wish, you can choose not to
- supply this information, but be aware that unless and until you
- do, any GEDCOM files you export will not be valid.
-
-
-
- GRAMPS Getting Started Window: Researcher Information
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Researcher Information Window.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Entering personal information
- This information can be entered at any time in the
- Preferences dialog, under the Database/Researcher Information
- category.
-
-
-
-
- Choosing a database on startup
-
- If &app; is started without a database selected, the following
- window will appear prompting you to choose one to open.
-
-
-
- Open Database Window
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Open Database Window.
-
-
-
-
-
- To open a database that you have recently opened, choose the
- top selection, select your database from the menu and
- click OK.
-
- To open an existing database you have not recently opened,
- choose the middle selection and click
- OK. &app; will then ask you to specify the
- name of the database you wish to open.
-
- As you might guess, to create a new database, choose
- "Create a new database"
-
-
- Selecting file
-
- If you're familiar with version 1.0.X of GRAMPS, you'll note
- that version 2.0 does not require you to select a directory in
- which to store the database.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Obtaining Help
-
- GRAMPS has a Help menu
- that you can consult at any time. It includes the following items:
-
-
-
-
-
- User manual
-
-
- An electronic version of the manual that you can access while you work in GRAMPS.
-
-
-
-
-
- FAQ
-
- A list of Frequently Asked Questions about &app;.
-
-
-
-
- GRAMPS home page
-
- A link to the GRAMPS' project web site.
-
-
-
-
- GRAMPS mailing lists
-
-
- Gives you direct access to GRAMPS' mailing list archives.
-
-
-
-
-
- Report a bug
-
-
- Choose this item to file a bug report in our bug tracking
- system. (Remember, &app; is a living project. We want to
- know about any problems you encounter so we can work to
- solve them for everyone's benefit.)
-
-
-
-
-
- Show plugin status
-
-
- Use this item to display the status of any plugins you may have added.
-
-
-
-
-
- Open example database
-
-
- Select this item to load the example database that is
- included in your GRAMPS package. This database is composed
- of fictitious people and serves as a useful example for
- learning how to work with GRAMPS.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Main Window
-
-
- When you open a database (either existing or new), the
- following window is displayed:
-
-
-
- GRAMPS Main Window
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The main &app; window contains the following elements:
-
-
-
-
-
- Menubar
-
-
- The menubar is located at the very top of the window (right
- below the window title) and provides access to all the features
- of &app;.
-
-
-
-
-
- Toolbar
-
-
- The toolbar is located right below the menubar. It gives you
- access to the most frequently used
- functions of &app;. You can set options that control how it
- appears by going to
- EditPreferences. You can also hide it entirely by going to ViewToolbar.
-
-
-
-
-
- Progress Bar
-
-
- The Progress Bar is located in the lower left corner of the
- &app; window. It displays the progress of time consuming
- operations, such as opening and saving large data bases,
- importing and exporting to other formats, generating web
- sites, etc. When you are not doing these types of operations,
- the Progress Bar is blank.
-
-
-
-
-
- Status Bar
-
-
- The Status Bar is located to the right of the Progress Bar,
- on the very bottom of the &app; window. It displays
- information about current &app; activity and contextual
- information about the selected items. The behavior of the
- Status Bar can be adjusted in the Preferences dialog, which
- can be found by selecting
- EditPreferences.
-
-
-
-
-
- Display area
-
-
- The largest area in the center of the &app; window is the
- display area. What it displays depends on the currently
- selected View. We'll discuss Views in detail below.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Views
-
- Genealogical information is very broad and can be extremely
- detailed. Displaying it poses a challenge that GRAMPS takes on by
- dividing and organizing the information into a series of
- Views. Each View displays a portion of the total information,
- selected according to a particular category. This will become
- clearer as we explore the six different Views, listed
- below:
-
-
- People View
- Family View
- Pedigree View
- Sources View
- Places View
- Media View
-
-
- Before we launch into a description of each View,
- let's first explain how to switch between Views.
-
-
- Switching Views and Viewing Modes
-
- As mentioned above there are six different Views. In
- addition, there are two different Viewing Modes. You can tell at
- a glance which Viewing Mode you are in: If you see icons listed
- vertically in a sidebar at the left of the window, you are in
- the Sidebar Viewing Mode. If instead you see a series of
- "notebook tabs" (labeled People, Family, Pedigree, Sources,
- Places, Media) that run horizontally across the window, then you
- are in the Tabbed Viewing Mode. You can switch from one Viewing
- Mode to another by selecting ViewSidebar from the Sidebar menu item.
-
- If you're in the Sidebar Viewing Mode, you can select the View
- you want by clicking one of the sidebar icons.
-
-
- Sidebar Viewing Mode
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows sidebar viewing mode.
-
-
-
-
-
- If you're in the Tabbed Viewing Mode, you can select the
- View you want by clicking the corresponding notebook tab.
-
-
- Tabbed Viewing Mode
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows tabbed viewing mode.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- People View
-
- When &app; first opens a database, it displays the
- People View ( and ). This view lists
- all the people stored in the database.
-
-
-
- You'll note that people are grouped according to their family
- names. To the left of each family name is an arrow. Clicking it
- once will reveal the entire list of people sharing that
- name. Clicking the arrow again will "roll up" the
- list and show only the family name.
-
-
-
-
- By default, the People View, displays the following columns:
- Names, &app; ID
- numbers, Gender, and their
- Birth and Death
- dates. You can add or remove columns to and from
- the display by calling up the Column
- Editor dialog
- (EditColumn
- Editor) and checking or unchecking
- the boxes listed. You can also change the position of a column
- in People View by clicking and dragging it to a new position
- in the Editor. Once you have made the changes you want, click
- OK to exit the Editor and see your
- changes in the People View.
-
-
-
-
- Column Editor
-
- The Column Editor is available in all Views and works the
- same way in each.
-
-
-
-
- Column Editor Dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows column editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Filters
-
-
-
- Genealogical databases can contain information on many people,
- families, places, and objects. It's therefore possible for a
- View to contain a long list of data that's difficult to
- work with. &app; gives you a means for controlling this
- condition by allowing you to filter a list to a more
- manageable size.
-
-
-
-
- Filter Controls Displayed
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows filter controls.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- When &app; opens a database, no filtering is in effect. In
- People View, for example, all people in the database are
- listed by default. To filter the list, go to
- ViewFilter
- . This will place a new menu just above the list
- of People. Click on the double arrows of this menu to get a
- pop-up list of all the criteria by which you can filter the
- People listed. Choose a filter (for example, "Males"
- or "People with children") and click
- Apply.
-
-
-
-
- Displaying the filter
-
-
- To reduce screen clutter, the filter menu is hidden by
- default. To display it, go to the
- ViewFilter
- menu. Please understand that even if the
- filter menu is not displayed, filtering may still be in
- effect. (Thus, we say that filtering is persistent.) If you
- are unsure if your list is filtered, bring up the filter
- menu (by going to View
- Filter) and check
- if any filtering is set.
-
-
-
-
-
- Example filter use
-
- To show males only, choose the Males
- filter, then click the Apply
- button. To cancel any filtering, set the filter to
- Entire Database and then click the
- Apply button.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Family View
-
- The Family View displays the family information of a
- selected person that we call the Active person. Specifically,
- it shows his or her closest relationships.
-
-
-
- Family View
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Family View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The Family View displays the following series of list boxes:
-
-
-
-
- Active person
-
-
- Shows birth and death data for the individual you have
- selected. Double-click inside the box to edit the Active
- person's information. Click on the double arrow to the
- right and the currently selected Spouse will become the
- new Active person.
-
-
-
-
-
- Relationship
-
-
- Displays birth and death data for the Active person's
- Spouse(s).
-
-
- Terminology
-
- In the Family View, we use the term "spouse"
- for sake of simplicity. However, please note that
- "spouse" may in fact be a domestic partner, a
- partner in a civil union, etc.
-
-
-
-
- Double-click a Spouse to edit his or her
- relationship to the Active person. Shift-click (that is,
- hold down the Shift key while you click) a Spouse to edit
- his or her personal information. Click the icon to the
- top right of the Relationship box to add a new person to
- the database and to create a relationship between this
- person and the Active person. Click the middle icon to
- create a relationship between the Active person and
- another person already stored in the database. Click the
- minus (-) button to remove the relationship between the
- currently selected Spouse and the Active person. (Note
- that this does not remove the Spouse from the database.)
-
-
-
-
-
- Active person's parents
-
-
-
- Click the + or
- - buttons to add or remove parents
- of the Active person. Click the right arrow button to make
- the Father the new Active person and the Mother the new
- Spouse.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Spouse's parents
-
-
- This list box functions the same as that of the Active
- person's parents.
-
-
-
-
-
- Children
-
-
-
- Displays the children of the Active person and the
- currently selected Spouse. The list can be ordered however
- you want by clicking on a column heading.
-
-
-
- Note that in addition to columns for Name, ID, Gender,
- Birth Date, and Death Date, there is a column labeled
- Status.1 This column reflects the relationship between the
- child and his parents (Birth, Adoption, etc.).
-
-
-
- As with the other list boxes, the Children list box has
- some associated buttons. Click the left arrow button to
- make the selected Child the Active person. Click the next
- button down to add a new person to the database and to
- make this person a Child of the Active person. Click the
- next button down to select a person from the database and
- to make this person a Child of the Active person. Click
- the lowest button to remove the selected Child from the
- Family (note that this does not remove the Child from the
- database).
-
-
-
- Right Click Menu
-
- Most of the functions described above can also be executed
- by right-clicking your mouse.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The layout of the Family View can be switched from the
- "left-to-right" arrangement shown in to the
- "top-to-bottom" arrangement shown in . This is
- done by going to
- EditPreferences
- and selecting the Display section of
- the dialog that appears.
-
-
-
-
- Alternative Family View
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Alternative Family View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Pedigree View
-
-
-
- The Pedigree View displays a family tree of the Active
- person's ancestors. The Pedigree View shows up to five
- generations, depending on the size of the window. Each person is
- indicated by a box labeled with his or her name. Two lines
- branch from each box. The top one shows the person's father
- and the bottom one the mother. Solid lines represent birth
- relations, while dashed lines represent non-birth relations
- such as adoption, step-parenthood, guardianship, etc.
-
-
-
-
- Pedigree View
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Pedigree View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- If you move your mouse over a box, it expands to show birth
- and death dates. If you move your mouse over a line, the line
- gets highlighted, indicating an active link. Double-click the
- line to make the corresponding ancestor the Active
- person.
-
-
-
-
- Children Menu
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Children Menu in Pedigree View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To the left of the Active person is a left arrow button. If
- the Active person has children, clicking this button expands a
- list of the Active person's children. Selecting one of the
- children makes that child the pctive Person.
-
-
-
- The appearance of the children's names in the menu
- differentiates the "dead ends" of the tree from the
- continuing branches. Children who have children themselves
- appear in the menu in the boldface and italic type, while
- children without children ("dead ends") appear in a
- regular font. If the Active person has only one child, no menu
- will be displayed (since there is only one choice) and the
- child will become the Active person when the arrow button is
- clicked.
-
-
-
- The right-hand side of the window shows two right arrow
- buttons. When the top button is clicked, the Father of the
- Active person becomes the Active person. Clicking the bottom
- button makes the Mother of the Active person the Active
- person.
-
-
-
-
- Personal Context Menu
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Context Menu in Pedigree View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Right-clicking on any person's box in the Pedigree View will
- bring up the "context menu". Among other useful
- items, the context menu has sub-menus listing
- Spouses, Siblings,
- Children, and
- Parents of that
- person. "Greyed-out" sub-menus indicate the absence
- of the data in the appropriate category. Similarly to the
- children menu above, Childrens' and Parents' menus distinguish
- continuing lines from dead ends.
-
-
-
-
- Pedigree View with the Anchor
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Pedigree View with the anchor set.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Pedigree View gives you an additional, advanced way of
- labeling generations. This feature becomes available by
- setting the "anchor" on a selected person. If the
- anchor is set, the generations are labeled as follows:
-
-
-
-
-
- The Anchor Person (and his/her generation) is labeled as
- 0.
-
-
-
-
- The ancestor generations are numbered with positive integers
- (1,2,
- 3,etc.).
-
-
-
-
- The descendant generations are numbered with negative integers
- (-1,-2,
- -3, etc.).
-
-
-
-
- In all cases, the number represents the number of
- generations between the labeled generation and the anchor
- person. In this mode, you can travel along the extensive
- pedigree line and see the number of generations removed
- from the Anchor Person.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To set the anchor, select the person you want as the Active
- person (recall that you can do so in the Pedigree View by
- clicking the line that leads to the person from his or her
- child). Then, while in Pedigree View, right click anywhere in
- the main window. A context menu will appear. Select
- Set anchor and you will see the Active
- person indicated as the anchor in the lower left corner.
- This newly established Anchor Person will remain in effect
- until you right-click again and select Remove
- anchor from the context menu or until a new Active
- person is chosen who is unrelated to the Anchor Person.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources View
-
-
- Sources View lists the sources of certain information stored
- in the database. These can include various documents (birth,
- death, and marriage certificates, etc.), books, films,
- journals, private diaries, - nearly anything that can
- provide genealogical evidence. GRAMPS gives you the option
- to provide a source for each event you record (births,
- deaths, marriages, etc.). The Source View lists the
- Title, ID, and
- Author of the source, as well as any
- Publication information that may be
- associated with it.
-
-
-
- The list of Sources can be sorted in the usual manner, by
- clicking on a column heading. Clicking once sorts in
- ascending order, clicking again sorts in descending
- order. The Column Editor dialog can be
- used to add, remove and rearrange the displayed columns.
-
-
-
-
- Sources View
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Sources View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Places View
-
-
- The Places View lists the geographical places in which the
- events of the database took place. These could be places of
- birth, death, and marriages of people, as well as their
- home, employment, education addresses, or any other
- conceivable reference to the geographical location. The
- Places View lists the places' Name,
- ID, Church Parish,
- City, County,
- State, and
- Country. All of these columns can be
- used for sorting by the usual sorting rules. The
- Column Editor dialog may be used to
- add, remove and rearrange the displayed columns.
-
-
-
-
- Places View
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Places View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Media View
-
- Media View
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Media View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The Media View is a list of Media Objects used in the
- database. Media Objects are any files that relate somehow
- to the stored genealogical data. Technically, any file can
- be stored as a Media Object. Most frequently, these are
- images, audio files, animation files, etc. The list box on
- the bottom lists the Name,
- ID, Type, and
- Path of the Media Object. The
- Column Editor dialog may be used to
- rearrange the displayed columns, which obey usual sorting
- rules. The top part of the GRAMPS window shows a preview (if
- available) and information about the Media Object.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Usage
-
-
- Now we turn to a detailed exploration of the day-to-day use of
- GRAMPS. First, we should point out that GRAMPS often offers more
- than one way to do the same task. We'll try to point out some of
- these alternatives where appropriate.
-
-
-
-
- Starting a New Database
-
-
- To start a new database, choose
- FileNew
- . You will then be asked to give the new database a name.
-
-
-
-
- &app; databases
-
-
- &app; stores your data in a Berkeley database, sometimes
- known as BSDDB. These files have ".grdb" as
- their default extension. The extension is automatically
- added to your filename.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Opening a Database
-
-
- To open a database, either choose
- File
- Open or click the
- Open button on the Toolbar. The
- Open database dialog will appear and you'll
- see a list of files. If you don't see the file you're looking
- for, make sure the All files filter is selected. (This dialog
- has a "filetype" filter, meaning it may only be
- showing files that have a certain extension.)
-
-
-
- To open a recently accessed database, choose
- FileOpen Recent
- and select the filename from the list.
-
-
-
- If you do not have "write permissions" for the
- selected database, it will be opened in a Read Only mode. In
- this mode, the data may be viewed, but no changes will be made
- to the database. To indicate this mode, the title of the main
- window will be appended with (Read Only)
- text.
-
-
-
- GRAMPS allows you to open certain databases that have not been
- saved in GRAMPS' own file format. These include XML and GEDCOM
- databases. But you should be aware that if the XML or GEDCOM
- database is relatively large, you may encounter some performance
- problems. These can be avoided by creating a new GRAMPS database
- and importing your XML/GEDCOM data into it.
-
-
-
-
- Opening XML and GEDCOM databases
-
-
- XML and GEDCOM databases require all data to be held in
- memory. GRAMPS' native grdb format does not. Thus, a database
- with a grdb format can access data quicker and more efficiently.
-
-
-
-
-
- GEDCOM Editing
-
-
- Please keep in mind that some information in a GEDCOM file may
- be lost during import into &app;. Simply opening and viewing
- the file will not change it. However, if any changes were
- made and they were not abandoned upon exit, exiting &app; will
- save the data, with possible data loss.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Saving Changes to Your Database
-
-
- GRAMPS saves your changes as soon as you apply them. This means,
- for example, that any time you click OK
- when using GRAMPS, your changes are immediately recorded and
- saved. There is no separate "save" command (although
- there is a "save as" command that we'll discuss later.)
-
-
-
- You can undo changes you've made by selecting
- Edit
- Undo. If you select this
- command repeatedly, your most recent changes will be undone one at
- a time.
-
-
-
- If you want to return your database to the way it was when you
- opened it, select
- FileAbandon changes
- and quit. (This is just like quitting
- without saving in other programs.)
-
-
-
- If you would like to save your database under a different name,
- you can do so by choosing File
- Save as... and specifying
- the name (and, optionally, the format) of your new database. Note
- that "Save as" will allow you to continue editing the
- newly saved database. If this is not what you want to do, you may
- wish to use the "Export" command instead.
-
-
-
-
-
- Importing Data
-
-
- Importing allows you to bring data from other genealogy programs
- into a &app; database. Currently, &app; can import data from the
- following formats:
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Another &app; database (having the "grdb" file
- extension),
-
-
-
- GEDCOM
-
-
- &app; XML
-
-
- &app; package
-
-
- GeneWeb
-
-
-
-
- Importing vs. opening
-
- Please recognize that importing a database is different from
- opening a database. When you import, you are actually bringing
- data from one database into a GRAMPS database. When you open a
- file, you are editing your original file.
-
-
-
-
-
- To import data, select File
- Import. The Import
- database dialog will open, asking you to specify the
- file you wish to import.
-
-
-
-
- Data loss with some formats
-
- It is important to note that the importing process is not
- perfect for GEDCOM and GeneWeb databases. There is a chance
- that some of the data in these databases will not be imported
- into &app;.
-
-
-
-
- The &app; database (grdb), &app; XML, and &app; package are all
- native &app; formats. There is no risk of information loss
- when import or exporting to these formats.
-
-
-
-
- &app; database (grdb)
-
-
- The native &app; database format is a specific form of
- Berkeley database (BSDDB) with a special structure of data
- tables. This format is binary and
- architecture-dependent. It is very quick and efficient,
- but not generally portable across computers with
- different binary architecture (e.g. i386 vs alpha).
-
-
-
-
-
- &app; XML
-
-
- The &app; XML file was the default format for
- older versions of &app;. Unlike the grdb
- format, it is architecture independent and
- human-readable. The database may also have references to
- non-local (external) media objects, therefore it is not
- guaranteed to be completely portable. The &app; XML
- database is created by saving (
-
- File
- Save As...
-
- ) or exporting (
-
- File
- Export...
-
- ) data in that format
-
-
-
-
- &app; package
-
-
- The &app; package is a compressed archive containing the &app;
- XML file and all media objects (images, sound files,
- etc.) to which the database refers. Because it contains all
- the media objects, this format is completely portable.
- The &app; package is created by exporting (
-
- File
- Export...
-
- ) data in that format.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- If you import information from another GRAMPS database or GRAMPS
- XML database, you will see the progress of the operation in the
- progress bar of GRAMPS' main window.
-
-
-
- If you import a GEDCOM database, you will see the import dialog
- shown in . The information in
- the dialog is updated as the import progresses.
-
-
-
-
- GEDCOM Import
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows GEDCOM Import Window.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- If a media file is not found during import, you'll be prompted
- to take one of the actions indicated in .
-
-
-
- Missing Media dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Missing Media dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- If you don't have the missing file and have no possibility of
- replacing it, click the Remove Object
- button. This will remove the object that corresponds to the
- missing file as well as all the references in the database to
- that object.
-
-
-
-
- If you're not sure where the missing file is, but think you
- still have it or may be able to find it, click the
- Keep Reference button. If and when you
- find the file, you can simply copy it into your database
- directory and have access to it through &app;.
-
-
-
-
- If you can supply the missing file during the import
- operation, click the Select File
- button. This will copy the file you select in place of the
- missing file. No references will be altered in the database.
-
-
-
-
- To automatically use the selection made in this dialog for
- all missing media files, check the Use this
- selection for all missing media files box. This
- will remember your choice and use it for all media files
- missing during this import, so that no further dialogs will
- be presented. Use this option if you anticipate many missing
- files and want to deal with all of them in the same manner.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Exporting Data
-
-
- Exporting allows you to share any portion of your &app; database
- with other researchers as well as to enable you to transfer your
- data to another computer. Currently, &app; can export data to
- the following formats: &app; database (grdb), &app; XML, GEDCOM,
- &app; package, Web Family Tree, and GeneWeb.
-
-
-
-
- Export is saving a copy
-
- When you export, you are saving a copy of the currently opened
- database. Exporting creates another file with a copy of your
- data. Note that the database that remains opened in your GRAMPS
- window is NOT the file saved by your export. Additional editing
- of the currently opened database will not alter the copy
- produced by the export.
-
-
-
-
- To export data, choose File
- Export. This will
- bring up the Export assistant. Its pages
- will guide you through the format selection (see ), file selection, and format
- specific export options (see ). After a final confirmation
- page, the export will be performed according to the choices you
- have made. At any time, you can click the
- Back and revise any selection, and then
- go forward to redo the export.
-
-
-
- Export assistant: format selection
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows format selection page of an Export assistant
-
-
-
-
-
- Exporting into the GEDCOM format
-
-
- &app; allows you to export a database into the common GEDCOM
- format. It provides options that allow you to fine tune your
- export (see ).
-
-
-
-
- Encoding
-
-
- Since different languages use different characters, it is
- important to tell a GEDCOM file what character set is used.
- The two formats traditionally accepted are ASCII and ANSEL.
- Since all ASCII characters are valid ANSEL characters,
- GRAMPS does not provide an option for ASCII.
-
-
- Because ANSEL is not commonly used, some genealogy programs
- will accept ANSI (more commonly know as ISO-8859-1) and
- Unicode character sets. Only select ANSI or Unicode if you
- know any program that attempts to read the GEDCOM file will
- understand these character sets.
-
-
-
-
- Filter
-
-
- The filter allows you to export a limited amount of data,
- based on the criteria you select.
-
-
-
-
-
- Target
-
-
- While GEDCOM is a standard, not every program implements
- it in the same way. This can lead to data loss. &app; can
- reduce the data loss in some cases. You can tell &app;
- what program is the target, and &app; will customize the
- exported file for that program. If your program is not
- listed, choose the "GEDCOM 5.5 Standard".
-
-
-
-
-
- Copyright
-
-
- Allows you to select a statement to describe your Copyright
- claim.
-
-
-
-
-
- No not include records marked private
-
-
- Check this box to prevent private records from being
- included in the exported file.
-
-
-
-
-
- Restrict data on living people
-
-
- Check this box to limit the information exported for living
- people. This means that all information concerning their
- birth, death, addresses, significant events, etc., will be
- omitted in the exported GEDCOM file. If you choose this
- option, you will be given additional options to limit
- further the data on living people. For example, you can
- choose to substitute the word "Living" for the
- first name; you can exclude notes; and you can exclude
- sources for living people.
-
-
- Sometimes, it is not always obvious from the data if someone
- is actually alive. &app; uses an advanced algorithm to try
- to determine if a person could still be alive. Remember,
- &app; is making its best guess, and it may not always be
- able to guess correctly all the time. Please double check
- your data.
-
-
-
-
-
- Reference images from path
-
-
- Check this box to tell GRAMPS to use the specific path for
- your images when writing image references in GEDCOM.
-
-
- This option allows specify where your image files are
- located. This is useful when you are transfering your GEDCOM
- file from one computer to another. It tells the program
- that is importing the data where your images are.
-
-
-
-
-
- Export assistant: GEDCOM options
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows GEDCOM options page of an Export druid
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Export into &app; formats
-
-
- &app; database (grdb) export
-
-
- Exporting to the &app; native format will simply make a
- copy of your data under another name. Exporting to this
- format can also be useful if you have directly opened
- an XML or GEDCOM file and would like to save it as the
- grdb file.
-
-
-
-
- &app; XML database export
-
-
- Exporting into &app; XML format will produce a database
- compatible with the previous versions of &app;. As XML
- is a text-based human-readable format, you may also use
- it to take a look at your data.
-
-
-
-
- &app; package export
-
-
- Exporting to the &app; package format will create a
- compressed file that contains the database and copies of
- all associated media files. This is useful if you want to
- move your database to another computer or to share it with
- someone.
-
-
-
-
- Export to CD
-
-
- Exporting to CD will prepare your database and copies of
- all media object files for recording onto a CD. To
- actually burn the CD, you will need to go to the GNOME
- burn:/// location, which can be
- accessed by navigating through Nautilus: After exporting
- to CD, select Go
- CD Creator in the
- Nautilus menu. Your database directory will show up. To
- burn it to the CD, click the CD icon on the Nautilus
- toolbar, or select
- FileWrite to
- CD in the Nautilus menu.
-
-
-
-
-
- If a media file is not found during export, you will see the
- same Missing Media dialog you encounter
- with GEDCOM export.
-
-
-
-
-
- Export into other formats
-
-
- Web Family Tree
-
-
- Exporting to Web Family Tree will create a text file
- that can be used by the Web Family Tree program.
- Export options include filter selection and the ability
- to limit data on living people to that of their family
- ties.
-
-
-
-
- GeneWeb
-
-
- Exporting to GeneWeb will save a copy of your data into
- a popular web genealogy format. To find out more about
- GeneWeb and its format, visit
- http://cristal.inria.fr/~ddr/GeneWeb/en/.
-
-
-
-
- vCalendar and vCard
-
-
- Exporting to vCalendar or vCard will save information in
- a format used in many calendaring and addressbook
- applications, sometimes called PIM for Personal
- Information Manager.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Entering and Editing Data: Quick Start Overview
-
-
- This section is designed to give you the basic knowledge necessary
- to start putting your genealogical information into &app;. It
- will explain how to enter people into the database and how to
- specify their family relationships. (A more detailed explanation
- will follow in the section entitled .)
-
-
-
- First, let's identify the types of information you can enter into
- your GRAMPS database. These include:
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Personal information about an individual (names, addresses,
- birth and death dates, etc.)
-
-
-
-
- Information about an individual's relationships (marriages,
- divorces, civil unions, etc.)
-
-
-
-
- Information about an individual's parents and children
-
-
-
-
- Sources that document your research
-
-
-
-
-
- Keybindings
-
- In addition to interacting with GRAMPS through menu items and
- buttons, you can use its extensive set of
- "keybindings." For more information, see .
-
-
-
-
- Now let's take a quick look at how you can enter and edit these
- various types of information.
-
-
-
- To Add or Edit a Person
-
- To add a person to the database, switch to the People View
- () and then click the
- Add on the toolbar. Enter any data you
- know about this person into the Edit
- Person dialog (see
- for details).
-
- To edit information about a person already
- present in the database, select the person from the People View
- and click the Edit
- button on the toolbar.
-
-
-
- Alternate ways of adding or editing a person
-
- You can also use Add... and
- Edit... menu items available under
- Edit. Or you can right-click on the
- person and select Add... or
- Edit... from the context menu that pops
- up.
-
-
-
-
-
- To Specify a Relationship
-
-
- To specify a relationship, select the person for whom the
- relationship applies. Switch to the Family View
- () and you'll see this individual
- indicated as the "Active person".
-
-
-
- Now a question: Does the person who will form the relationship
- with the Active person already exist in the database? If yes,
- click the middle button to the right of the Spouse box. You'll
- then be able to browse through the list of people in the
- database to select the one you want. If not, click the topmost
- button to the right of the Spouse box. This will allow you to
- add a new person to the database and to specify the
- relationship this person has to the Active person.
-
-
-
-
- Filtering
-
- By default, GRAMPS filters the displayed list to show only
- those people who could theoretically have a relationship with
- the Active Person. That is, GRAMPS only shows those people
- whose birth dates and death dates fit within the lifetime of
- the Active Person. If you wish, you can add a person to the
- list by clicking the + button. To
- completely override the filter and display all people from the
- database, check the Show all box.
-
-
-
-
- To edit an existing relationship, double-click in the Spouse
- box. If there is more than one relationship in the list, you can
- select the spouse or partner you want from the list before
- double-clicking.
-
-
-
- Alternate ways of editing relationships.
-
- Most of the functions described above are also available in
- the context menu that pops up when you right-click.
-
-
-
-
-
- To Specify Parents
-
-
- To specify the parents for a person, highlight that individual
- in the People View and then switch to the Family View (). Your selected person will be
- indicated as the Active person. Click the
- + button to the right of the
- Active person's parents list box. This
- will bring up the Choose Parents
- dialog. You will see three sections, one for father, one for
- mother, and one for specifying the relationships between
- everyone.
-
-
-
- If the father and mother of the Active person are already stored
- in your database, you can scroll through the lists and make your
- selections. If they are not in the database, you can click
- + to add them.
-
-
-
- Filtering
-
- By default, GRAMPS will limit both lists to people who could
- possibly be the parents (judged by the date of birth) of the
- Active person. To override this, check the Show all box for
- each list.
-
-
-
-
- To specify parents of the Active person's spouse, switch to
- Family View and then click the + button
- to the right of the Spouse's parents list box.
-
-
-
- To edit information about parents who are already present in the
- database, move the mouse over the corresponding parents' box and
- double-click.
-
-
-
- Alternate ways of specifying parents
-
- These functions can also be performed by right-clicking on the
- parents' box and using the context menu that pops up.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To Specify Children
-
- To specify children of an Active person, switch to the Family
- View () and then click either the
- second or the third button from the top right of the
- children list box. The second button adds a child to the
- database and to the family, while the third button adds a
- child to the family who is already present in the database.
-
-
- If using the third button, select a child from the list and
- specify the child's relationship with father and mother using
- menus at the bottom. If you want, you can add a person to the
- list by clicking the Add... button. By
- default, &app; will limit the lists to people who could
- possibly be the child (judged by the date of birth) of the
- active person. To override this, check the Show
- all box.
-
-
- The relationship of the child to the parents can be modified by
- right-clicking in the children's box and using the context menu
- that pops up. Again, most of the above functions are available
- through this context menu.
-
-
-
-
- Adding Photos and Other Media Objects
-
- You can add photos and other media objects to individual people,
- events, sources, and places. You can also add images that might
- not be limited to a single person or event (for example, group
- family photos).
-
- If you want to add an image to a single person, switch to the
- People View (), select a
- person, and then click the Edit icon on
- the toolbar. This will bring up the Edit
- Person dialog (). Next, select the
- Gallery tab, and click the
- + button to call up the Select
- a media object dialog. Type a filename or browse to
- find the image file you want and then provide a title for that
- image. Keep adding images until you are done.
-
- To add images related to a relationship (for example, a
- marriage), switch to the Family View () and double-click on the Spouse box. This
- calls up the Marriage/Relationship editor
- dialog. Select the Gallery tab and click
- the + button to add an image.
-
- To add images related to a source or a place, first switch to
- the Source View () or Place View
- (). Select the source or place you
- want and then either double-click on it or click the
- Edit icon on the toolbar. Select the
- Gallery tab and click the
- + button to add an image.
-
-
-
- Finally, to add images that you want to include in the database,
- but hare are not limited to any particular person, relationship,
- source or place, switch to the Media View (). Then click the
- Add icon on the toolbar to add an
- image. If you have already added any images to any individual
- galleries, you will also find them listed in the Media View.
-
-
-
- Alternate way of adding images to galleries
-
- An image can always be added to any gallery by using
- drag-and-drop. Items can be dragged from the Media View, any
- gallery, the desktop, the file manager or a web browser and
- dropped on the target gallery, adding the image to the
- gallery.
-
-
-
-
- In any gallery, you can also use the
- Edit to edit image information and the
- - button and to remove the image
- reference from that gallery.
-
-
-
- Removing an image from a gallery
-
- Removing a media object from a gallery does not remove the
- image from the database. To completely remove the image from
- the database, delete it from Media View by first selecting it
- and then clicking the Remove icon on
- the toolbar.
-
-
-
-
-
- To Edit Sources and Places
-
- To add a source or a place to the database, switch to the
- appropriate Source View () or
- Place View (). Then click the
- Add icon on the toolbar to add a
- source/place. Enter the information into the Source
- Editor (or Place Editor)
- dialog.
-
-
- To edit information about sources and places already present
- in the database, switch to the appropriate view, select an
- entry you would like to view/modify, and then click the
- Edit icon on the
- toolbar. Alternatively, you may double-click on the entry to
- edit it.
-
-
-
-
-
- Enterng and Editing Data: Complete Description
-
- The previous section offered you a quick overview of how to enter
- and edit data in GRAMPS. This section continues that discussion in
- much greater detail.
-
- As we have seen above, GRAMPS offers you a series of Views. Each
- of these Views gives you opportunities to enter and edit
- information. In fact, you can often get to the same information
- from different Views.
-
- In GRAMPS, information is entered and edited through what we call
- dialogs. Since we use that term frequently, we should define what
- we mean by it:
-
- A dialog is a pop-up window that provides one or more forms for
- entering and editing data that fits a certain category. Examples
- in GRAMPS include the Edit Person dialog and the
- Marriage/Relationship dialog, among many others.
-
- A dialog often includes a series of "notebook tabs" that
- group the information into subcategories. For example, the Edit
- Person dialog has notebook tabs for subcategories such as Events,
- Attributes, Addresses, and Notes, among others.
-
-
-
- Add, Remove, and Edit buttons
-
- In most cases, GRAMPS uses a + to
- correspond to Add, a
- - correspond to
- Remove, and an icon of a pen on a sheet
- of paper to denote Edit. We will continue
- referring to the latter as the Edit
- button, while using + and
- - to denote the two former buttons.
-
-
-
-
- Editing Information About People
-
-
- Information about people is entered and edited through the
- Edit Person dialog. This dialog can be
- invoked from different Views in the following ways:
-
-
-
-
- From the People View:
-
-
-
-
- Double-click the name of the person whose data you would
- like to edit
-
-
-
-
- Select the name by single click and
- then click the Edit button on the
- toolbar.
-
-
-
-
- Select the name and then press Enter.
-
-
-
-
- Select Edit... from the
- Edit menu of &app;
-
-
-
-
- Select Edit from the context menu
- that appears upon right-click on the name.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- From the Family View:
-
-
- To edit active person's data, move the mouse into the
- Active person box.
-
- To edit Spouse's data, shift-click the
- Spouse entry.
-
- From the Spouse and
- Children boxes you can select the
- desired person, right-click, and use the context menu
- that pops up.
-
-
-
-
- From the Pedigree View:
-
-
- Double-click in the box having the name of the person
- whose data you want to edit.
-
-
-
-
-
- In each of the above cases, the Edit Person
- dialog will appear:
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The top of the window shows the name of the person whose data is
- being edited. Below this name are ten "notebook tabs"
- containing different categories of available information. Click
- any tab to view and edit its contents. Clicking the
- OK button at the bottom will apply all
- the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog
- window. Clicking the Cancel button will
- close the window without applying any changes. If any data in
- any tabs were modified, an alert window will appear, prompting
- you to choose from the following options: close the dialog
- without saving changes, cancel the initial cancel request, or
- save the changes.
-
-
-
-
-
- Clicking OK will immediately save
- changes to the database. There is no need for a Save
- operation, since all changes are immediate.
-
-
-
-
- If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
- data. If not, it has no data.
-
-
-
- The tabs reflect the following categories of personal data:
-
-
-
- General
-
-
- The General tab contains general
- information about the person. This includes
- Given name, Family
- name, Family prefix (such
- as "de" or "van"),
- Suffix (e.g. Jr. or III),
- Title (e.g. Dr. or Rev.),
- Nickname (Bob for Robert),
- Type of the name (birth name, married
- name, etc.) and Date and
- Place of birth and death. Some of
- these (Family name,
- Type, and both
- Place fields), also provide
- "autocompletion" feature: as you type in these
- fields, a menu appears below the field containing database
- entries that match your
- partial input. This gives you a shortcut by letting you
- select an entry that already exists in the database rather
- than having to type it all out. You can select the entry
- using your mouse or using your arrow and
- Enter keys.
-
-
- The Edit (that is, the "pen and
- paper" icon) next to the Family
- name entry field invokes the Name
- Editor dialog. This dialog allows editing the
- preferred name in full detail (see ).
-
- The Gender radio buttons offer the
- choice of person's gender : male,
- female, and
- unknown.
-
-
- Clicking the colored "LED" buttons located next
- to the birth and death Date fields will bring up the
- Date Selection dialog allowing
- detailed modification of the date, see . Clicking either the
- Edit button located next to the
- birth and death LED buttons will bring up a dialog
- allowing you to edit the birth or death details (see ).
-
-
-
- The field ID displays the &app; ID
- number which identifies the user in the database. This value
- helps you distiguish between people who have the same name.
- You may enter any unique value you want. If you do not provide
- a value, &app; will automatically select a value for you.
-
-
-
- The Image area shows the first image
- available in the Gallery of this
- person (if any exist).
-
-
-
- Finally, the Information is complete
- and Information is private check
- buttons let you mark whether or not the person's record is
- complete and whether or not the record is private.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Names
-
-
-
-
- The Names tab lets you view and edit
- any alternate names the person may have. The bottom part
- of the window lists all alternate names for the person
- stored in the database. The top part shows the details of
- the currently selected name in the list (if any). The
- buttons +,
- Edit, and -
- allow the addition, modification, and removal of an
- alternate name from the database. Note that the Edit and -
- buttons become available only when an alternate name is
- selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - Names
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Names Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- When you add a new name or edit an existing name, the Name
- Editor dialog is invoked. This dialog is described in the
- section below (see ).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Events
-
-
-
- The Events tab lets you view and edit
- any events relevant to the person. The bottom part of the
- window lists all such events stored in the database. The
- top part shows the details of the currently selected event
- in the list (if any). The buttons
- +, Edit, and
- - allow you to add, modify, and
- remove an event record from the database. Note that the
- Edit and -
- buttons become available only when an event is selected
- from the list.
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - Events
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Events Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
- The Attributes tab lets you view and
- assign attributes to the person. You have complete freedom
- to define and use attributes. For example, attributes
- might be assigned to describe the person's physical
- characteristics or personality traits.
-
- Note that each attribute listed in the
- Attribute dialog consists of two
- parts: the Attribute itself and a Value associated with
- that Attribute. This so-called "Parameter-Value" pairing
- can help you organize and systematize your research. For
- example, if you define "Hair color" as an
- Attribute for a person, "Hair Color" will become
- a selectable Attribute for all other people. The Value of
- Hair Color for person A might be red, and brown for person
- B. In similar fashion, you might define an Attribute like
- "Generosity" and use the Value of
- "Enormous" to describe a particularly generous
- person.
-
- The bottom part of the dialog window displays the list of
- all Attributes stored in the database. The top part shows
- the details of the currently selected attribute in the
- list (if any). The buttons +,
- Edit, and -
- let you add, modify, and remove an attribute record from
- the database. Note that the Edit
- and - buttons become available only
- when an attribute is selected from the list.
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - Attributes
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Attributes Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Addresses
-
-
- The Addresses tab lets you view and
- record the various addresses of the person. The bottom
- part of the window lists all addresses stored in the
- database. The top part shows the details of the currently
- selected address in the list (if any). The buttons
- +, Edit, and
- - allow you to correspondingly add,
- modify, and remove an address record from the
- database. Note that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when an address is selected from the list.
-
- Some reports allow you to restrict data on living
- people. In particular, that option will omit their
- addresses.
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - Addresses
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Addresses Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Notes
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - Notes
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Notes Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The Notes tab provides a place to
- record various items about the person that do not fit
- neatly into other categories. To add a note or modify
- existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
- field.
-
- The Format option lets you set the
- way the note will appear in reports and web pages. If you
- select "Flowed," the text generated will have single
- spaces put in place of all multiple spaces, tabs, and
- single end-of-line characters. A blank line inserted
- between two blocks of text will signal a new paragraph;
- additional inserted lines will be ignored.
-
- If you select the Preformatted option, the text in reports
- and web pages will appear exactly as you enter it in the
- Notes dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - Sources
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Sources Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The Sources tab allows you to view
- and document the sources for the information you
- collect. These might be general sources that do not
- describe a specific event, but which nevertheless yield
- information about the person. For example, if Aunt
- Martha's memoirs mention her great-grandson Paul, the
- researcher may assume that this Paul actually existed and
- cite Aunt Martha's memoirs as the source that justifies
- this assumption.
-
-
-
-
- Sources which document specific events are best
- recorded as sources of the event (under the
- Events tab) instead of as a source
- of the person. The person's
- Sources tab is best used for
- any sources not specificly connected to any other data.
-
-
-
-
- The central part displays the list of all source
- references stored in the database in relation to the
- person. The buttons +,
- Edit, and
- - allow you to correspondingly
- add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
- person. Note that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when a source reference is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
- Gallery
-
-
-
-
- The Gallery tab lets you view and
- store photos, videos, and other media objects that are
- associated with the person. The central part of the window
- lists all such media objects. Any object in the form of a
- valid image file will result in the display of a thumbnail
- view of the image. For other objects such as audio files,
- movie files, etc., a corresponding file type icon is
- displayed instead.
-
-
-
-
- The first available image in the gallery will be also
- displayed in the Image area in
- the General tab.
-
-
-
-
- The buttons +,
- Select,
- Edit, and -
- let you add a new image to the database, link to an image
- already stored in the database, modify an image, and
- remove a given media object from the person's gallery.
- Note that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when a media object is selected from the list.
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - Gallery
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Gallery Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Removing a media object from a person's gallery does
- not remove it from the database. It only removes the
- reference to that object from this person's record.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Internet
-
-
-
-
- The Internet tab displays Internet
- addresses relevant to the person. The bottom part lists all
- such Internet addresses and accompanying descriptions. The
- top part shows the details of the currently selected
- addresses in the list (if any). The buttons
- +, Edit, and
- - let you add, modify, and remove an
- Internet address. The "Go" button (represented by
- an icon having a green arrow and yellow circle) opens your
- web browser and takes you directly to the highlighted
- page. Note that the Edit,
- -, and Go
- buttons become available only when an address is selected
- from the list.
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - Internet
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Internet Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LDS
-
-
- The LDS (Latter Days Saints) tab lets
- you view and edit information about LDS ordinances of the
- person. These are LDS Baptism, Endowment, and Sealed to
- Parents ordinances, as labeled inside the tab. Each
- ordinance is described by its date, LDS temple, and Place
- where it happened. An additional pop-up menu,
- "Parents," is available for the Sealed to
- Parents ordinance. Each ordinance can be further described
- through the selections available in the Status pop-up
- menu. It can also be include notes and references to
- sources through the corresponding
- Sources... and
- Note buttons.
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - LDS
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows LDS Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Editing Dates
-
- This section describes how to enter and modify dates. Since
- dates are so important in genealogical research, GRAMPS takes
- special care to preserve and use any date information available.
-
- Information can be entered into a date field by directly typing
- it or by invoking the Date selection dialog. Both methods will
- be discussed below, but first, we will cover some important
- features of dates as they are used in GRAMPS.
-
-
-
- Date types
-
- Dates in GRAMPS are classified according to the following types:
-
-
-
-
- Regular
-
-
- A "regular" date is one which includes a specific
- day, date, or month. It can be complete (e.g., June 6, 1990)
- or partial (e.g., July 1977).
-
-
-
-
-
- Before
-
-
- A "before" date is one that can only be identified
- as occurring before a certain day, month, or year.
-
-
-
-
-
- After
-
-
- An "after" date is one that occurs after a certain
- day, month, or year.
-
-
-
-
-
- Range
-
-
- A "range" describes a time period during which the
- event occurred. For example, "between January 1932 and
- March 1932."
-
-
-
-
-
- Span
-
-
- A "span" describes a time period during which a
- condition existed. For example, "from May 12, 2000 to
- February 2, 2002."
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Date formats and parsing rules
-
- GRAMPS recognizes dates entered in a variety of formats. The
- default numeric format is that which is conventional for the
- environment is which GRAMPS is operating; that is, DD.MM.YYYY
- for most European countries, MM/DD/YYYY for the U.S., and so
- on.
-
-
-
- Besides exact dates, &app; recognizes many dates that are
- not regular: before, after, about, ranges and spans. It also
- understands the quality: estimated or calculated. Finally,
- it supports partial dates and many alternative calendars.
- Below is the list of date entry rules to allow precise date
- parsing.
-
-
-
- Date parsing rules
-
- The list only applys to the English version of GRAMPS. If
- you are using localized version of &app;, your version may
- or may not provide a localized date parser. At the time
- of this writing, localized parsers exist for French, German,
- Russian, Finnish, Dutch and Spanish languages.
-
-
- If the localized parser is available for your version,
- chances are that other rules are in effect. If there is no
- manual in your language yet, you may try following your
- instinct and go with the common ways of denoting dates in
- your language. If all else fails, use the Date
- selection dialog described below.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Regular single dates can be entered just as you would
- write them. Examples: May 24, 1961 or January 1,
- 2004.
-
-
-
-
- Dates that are not regular should start with the
- quality: estimated or
- calculated, if applicable.
- Example: est. 1961, or calc 2005. (Note that a quality
- does not need to be specified for regular dates.)
-
-
-
-
- After the quality should appear the type. If the type is
- before, after,
- or about, you scan specify the type by
- writing "before", "after" or
- "about". If the type is a range, write
- "between DATE and DATE", and if the type is a
- span, write "from DATE to DATE". patterns, where
- DATE is a single date.
-
-
- Examples: est from 2001 to 2003, before June 1975, est
- about 2000, calc between May 1900 and January 1, 1990.
-
-
-
-
- Partial dates are entered simply by omitting unknown
- information. Examples: May 1961 and 2004.
-
-
-
-
- Alternate calendars are calendars other than the Gregorian
- calendar. Currently, &app; supports Hebrew, French
- Republican, Julian, Islamic, and Persian alternate
- calendars. To specify the calendar other than the
- default Gregorian, append the name of the calendar to
- the date string, e.g. "January 9, 1905 (julian)".
-
-
-
-
-
- Date Validity Indicators
-
- &app; uses color circles to indicate the validity of the
- entered date.
-
-
- Date LED buttons
-
- The color circles are also referred to as the LED buttons.
- Clicking on an LED button will invoke the Date
- selection dialog described in detail below, see
-
-
-
-
-
-
- A green circle means that the date is valid and complete
- regular date (e.g. May 24, 1961). In simple terms, green
- means that the date corresponds to a unique date.
-
-
-
-
- Yellow circle means that the date is valid but is not a
- regular date. This could be the date of a different
- type: a before date (before May 25, 1962), an after date
- (after May, 1960), an about date (about May 23, 1961), a
- range (between May 1, 1961 and May 31, 1961), or a span
- (from May 1, 1961 to May 31, 1961). It can also be a
- complete single date, but with quality of Estimated or
- Calculated. Finally, it could be a partial date, i.e. a
- regular quality single date missing some portion,
- e.g. May 1961 or 1961.
-
-
- While partial dates do not uniquely define the day, they
- allow at least for some type of comparisons between the
- dates.
-
-
-
-
- Red circle means that the date is not recognized as a
- valid date (e.g. "Christmas week of 61", or
- "the summer when I had surgery"). In such a
- case the date will be stored as a text string and
- therefore cannot be compared other dates. As you can
- see, it is best to avoid such date entries. It would be
- better, for example, to enter a date of "December
- 1961" and then to add the note "Christmas week
- of '61."
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Graphical User Interface for Entering Dates
-
- While the above parsing rules provide a guide for you to type
- in most common dates, you can also use Date
- selection dialog. The dialog is particularly useful
- for building a complex date or for simply insuring that your
- information is entered in a way GRAMPS will understand. The
- Date selection dialog can be invoked by
- clicking the colored circle button next to the date entry
- field.
-
-
-
-
- Date selection dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Date selection dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The Calendar menu lets you choose a
- calendar other than the default Gregorian. The
- Quality menu gives you the choices of
- Regular, Estimated, or Calculated. The
- Type menu allows you establish the exact
- date type: Regular, Before, After, About, Range, Span, and
- Text only. You can set the Date by
- setting the day, the month, and the year. In the event that
- your date type is Range or Span, the Second
- date will be activated. Finally, the Text
- comment text entry field allows storing an
- arbitrary text string along with the date.
-
-
-
-
-
- If you have an important comment to make about a date, you
- are better off doing so in a Note that corresponds to the
- event than in the Text comment field of the Date selection
- dialog. We recommend this for the following reason: If you
- enter a date by typing it directly into the date field (that
- is, not via the Date selector dialog), your entry will be
- copied and stored as the text comment string when GRAMPS
- parses the entered text. Thus, any comment that may have
- been there prior to the parsing will be overwritten.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Editing Information About Relationships
-
-
- Information about relationships is entered and edited through
- the Marriage/Relationship Editor
- dialog. This dialog is invoked from Family View by
- double-clicking the Spouse box
-
-
-
-
- You can also invoke this dialog by right-clicking inside the
- Spouse box and selecting "Edit relationship" item
- from the context menu that pops up.
-
-
-
-
- Marriage/Relationship Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Marriage/Relationship Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The top of the window shows the names of the people whose
- relationship is being edited. The main part of the window
- displays seven notebook tabs representing different categories
- of information about the relationship. Click any tab to view or
- edit the information it contains. The bottom part has
- OK and Cancel
- buttons. Clicking the OK button at any
- time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
- dialog window. Clicking the Cancel button
- at any time will close the window without applying any
- changes. If any of the data in any tab is modified, an alert
- window will appear that will prompt you choose between closing
- the dialog without saving changes, canceling the initial cancel
- request, or saving the changes.
-
-
-
-
- Clicking OK will immediately save
- changes to the database. This version of &app; does not have
- a separate saving function, all changes are immediate.
-
-
-
-
- If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
- data. If not, it has no data.
-
-
-
- The tabs provide the following information categories of
- relationship data:
-
-
-
-
- General
-
-
- The General tab lets you edit the
- Relationship type. The available types (such as Married,
- Unmarried, etc.) can be chosen from the drop-down
- Relationship type menu. The
- GRAMPS ID field displays the ID
- number which labels this relationship in the database. The
- Last changed label shows the last
- time the relationship was modified. Finally, the
- Information is complete check button indicates whether the
- record of this relationship is complete or not.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Events
-
-
- The Events tab lets you view and edit
- events relevant to the relationship. The bottom part
- displays the list of all such events stored in the
- database. The top part shows the details of the currently
- selected event in the list (if any). The buttons
- +, Edit, and
- - let you add, modify, or remove an
- event record from the database. Note that the
- Edit and -
- buttons become available only when an event is selected
- from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
- The Attributes tab lets you view and
- edit particular information about the relationship that
- can be expressed as attributes. The bottom part displays
- the list of all such attributes stored in the
- database. The top part shows the details of the currently
- selected attribute in the list (if any). The buttons
- +, Edit, and
- - let you add, modify, or remove an
- attribute. Note that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when an attribute is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Notes
-
-
-
- The Notes tab lets you view and edit
- notes associated with the relationship. These could be any
- comments which do not naturally fit into the
- "Parameter-Value" pairs available to
- Attributes. To add a note or modify existing notes simply
- edit the text in the text entry field.
-
-
-
- The Format option lets you set the
- way the note will appear in reports and web pages. If you
- select Flowed, the text generated will have single spaces
- put in place of all multiple spaces, tabs, and single
- end-of-line characters. A blank line inserted between two
- blocks of text will signal a new paragraph; additional
- inserted lines will be ignored.
-
-
- If you select the Preformatted option, the text in reports
- and web pages will appear exactly as you enter it in the
- Notes dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources
-
-
-
- The Sources tab lets you view and
- edit the sources which provide evidence for the
- relationship. These might be documents that refer to the
- relationship, but which do not necessarily document it
- officially. For example, if Aunt Martha's memoirs mention
- that her great-grandson Paul was married, the researcher
- may take this as evidence of the relationship between Paul
- and his wife existed and cite the memoirs as the source
- for this assumption.
-
-
-
-
- Sources that document specific events such as marriages
- or divorces are better filed in relation to those
- events, under the Events tab.
-
-
-
-
- The central part of the Sources window displays the list
- of all source references associated with the
- relationship. The buttons +,
- Edit, and -
- allow let you add, modify, and remove a source reference
- to this relationship. Note that the
- Edit and -
- buttons become available only when a source reference is
- selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Gallery
-
-
-
- The Gallery tab lets you store and
- display photos and other media objects associated with the
- relationship. The central part of the window lists all
- such objects and gives you a thumbnail preview of image
- files. Other objects such as audio files, movie files,
- etc., are represented by a generic GRAMPS icon. The
- buttons +,
- Select, Edit,
- and - let you add a new image, add a
- reference to an existing image, modify an existing image,
- and remove a media object's link to the relationship. Note
- that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only when
- a media object is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LDS
-
-
-
- The LDS (Latter Days Saints) tab
- displays information about the LDS Sealed to
- Spouse ordinance. The data can include date,
- LDS temple, and Place. The status of the ordinance can be
- described through the selections available in the
- Status pop-up menu and can also be
- referenced in the corresponding
- Sources... and
- Note buttons.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Editing Information About Sources
-
- To edit source data, switch to the Sources View and select the
- desired entry in the list of sources. Double-click that
- entry or click the Edit icon on the
- toolbar to invoke the following Source
- Editor dialog:
-
-
-
- Source Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Source Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The main part of the window displays four notebook tabs
- containing different categories of information. Click a tab to
- view or edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
- OK and Cancel
- buttons. Clicking OK will apply all the
- changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking
- the Cancel button will close the window
- without applying any changes.
-
-
-
-
- Clicking OK will immediately save
- changes to the database (write on disk). All changes are
- immediate.
-
-
-
-
- If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
- data. If not, it has no data.
-
-
-
- The tabs provide the following information categories of
- source data:
-
-
-
- General
-
-
- The General tab lets you define basic
- information about the source: its
- Title, Author,
- Abbreviation, and
- Publication information. You can type
- this information directly into the adjacent fields.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Note
-
-
- The Note tab provides a place to
- record various information about the source that does not
- fit neatly into other categories. To add a note or modify
- existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
- field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Data
-
-
-
- The Data tab displays
- "Key/Value" pairs that may be associated with
- the source. These are similar to the
- "Attributes" used for other types of GRAMPS
- records. The difference between these Key/Value pairs and
- Attributes is that Attributes may have source references
- and notes, while Key/Value data may not.
-
-
-
- The central part of the window lists all existing
- Key/Value pairs. The buttons + and
- - let you add and remove pairs. To
- modify the text of Key or Value, first select the desired
- entry. Then click in either the Key or Value cell of that
- entry and type your text. When you are done, click outside
- the cell to exit editing mode.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Gallery
-
-
-
- The Gallery tab lets you store and
- display photos and other media objects associated with a
- given source (for example, a photo of a birth
- certificate). The central part of the window lists all
- such media objects and gives you a thumbnail preview of
- image files. Other objects such as audio files, movie
- files, etc., are represented by a generic GRAMPS icon. The
- buttons +,
- Select,
- Edit, and -
- let you add a new image, add a reference to an existing
- image, modify an existing image, and remove a media
- object's link to the source. Note that the
- Edit and -
- buttons become available only when a media object is
- selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- References
-
-
-
- The References tab lists all the
- database records that refer to this source, if any. The
- list can be ordered by any of its column headings:
- Type, ID, or
- Name. Double-clicking an entry allows
- you to view and edit the record.
-
-
-
-
- Only primary objects can be shown in the
- References tab: Person, Family,
- Event, Place, or Media object. Secondary objects
- such as Names and Attributes can only be accessed
- through the primary objects to which they belong.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Editing Information About Places
-
-
- To edit information about places, switch to the Places View and
- select the desired entry from the list of places. Double-click
- that entry or click the Edit button on
- the toolbar to bring up the following Place
- Editor dialog:
-
-
-
-
- Place Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Place Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The main part of the window displays seven notebook tabs
- containing different categories of information. Click a tab to
- view or edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
- OK and Cancel
- buttons. Clicking OK will apply all the
- changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking
- the Cancel button will close the window
- without applying any changes.
-
-
-
-
-
- Clicking OK will immediately save
- changes to the database). All changes are immediate.
-
-
-
-
- If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
- data. If not, it has no data.
-
-
-
- The tabs represent following categories of place data:
-
-
-
- General
-
-
- The General tab you view and edit the
- basic information about the place: the
- Title which labels it in the
- database, City, Church
- parish, County,
- State, Country,
- Longitude, and
- Latitude. You can type this
- information directly into the adjacent fields.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Other names
-
-
- The Other names tab lets you view and
- edit other names by which the place might be known. The
- bottom part of the window lists all other names of the
- place stored in the database. The top part of the window
- shows the details of the currently selected name in the
- list (if any). The buttons +,
- Edit, and -
- let you add, modify, and remove a name record. Note that
- the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when a name is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Note
-
-
- The Note tab displays any comments or
- notes concerning the place. To add a note or modify
- existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
- field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources
-
-
-
- The Sources tab lets you view and
- edit sources relevant to a place. The central part of the
- window lists all such source references stored in the
- database. The buttons +,
- Edit, and -
- let you add, modify, and remove a source reference
- associated with a place. Note that the
- Edit and -
- buttons become available only when a source reference is
- selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Gallery
-
-
- The Gallery tab lets you store and
- display photos and other media objects associated with a
- given place. The central part of the window lists all such
- media objects and gives you a thumbnail preview of image
- files. Other objects such as audio files, movie files,
- etc., are represented by a generic GRAMPS icon. The
- buttons +,
- Select,
- Edit, and -
- let you add a new image, add a reference to an existing
- image, modify an existing image, and remove a media
- object's link to the place. Note that the
- Edit and -
- buttons become available only when a media object is
- selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Internet
-
-
- The Internet tab contains Internet
- addresses relevant to the place. The bottom part of the
- window lists all such Internet addresses stored in the
- database. The top part shows the details of the currently
- selected address in the list (if any). The buttons
- +, Edit, and
- - let you add, modify, and remove
- an Internet address. The Go button
- (represented by an icon with a green arrow and yellow
- circle) opens your browser and takes you to the web page
- corresponding to the highlighted Internet address. Note
- that the Edit,
- -, and Go
- buttons become available only when an address is selected
- from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- References
-
-
- The References tab indicates any
- database records (events or LDS ordinances) that refer to
- a place. This information cannot be modified from the
- Place Editor dialog. Instead, the corresponding database
- record (e.g., a birth event) has to be brought up and its
- place reference edited.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Editing Information About Media Objects
-
- To edit media data, switch to the Media View and select the
- desired entry in the list of sources. Double-click on that
- entry or click Edit on the toolbar to
- invoke the following Media Properties
- Editor dialog:
-
-
-
- Media Properties Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Media Properties Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- A thumbnail preview of the object is presented, along with a
- summary of its properties (ID, path, and object type). The
- central part of the window displays five notebook tabs
- containing different categories of information. Click a tab to
- view or edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
- OK and Cancel
- buttons. Clicking OK will apply all the
- changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking
- the Cancel button will close the window
- without applying any changes.
-
-
-
- Clicking OK will immediately save
- changes to the database (write on disk). All changes are
- immediate.
-
-
-
-
- If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
- data. If not, it has no data.
-
-
-
- The tabs represent the following categories of media data:
-
-
-
- General
-
-
- The General tab lets you view and
- edit the object's Title and Date. You can type this
- information directly into the corresponding fields. For
- the Date, you can also enter information by clicking the
- LED button and invoking the Date
- selection dialog.
-
-
-
- Every media object is referred to by its Path. The user
- is responsible for keeping track of the object
- files. GRAMPS will only reference and display the
- contents, not manage the files themselves.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
- The Attributes tab lets you view and
- edit particular information about the media object that
- can be expressed as Attributes. The bottom part displays
- the list of all such attributes stored in the
- database. The top part shows the details of the currently
- selected attribute in the list (if any). The buttons
- +, Edit, and
- - let you add, modify, or remove an
- attribute. Note that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when an attribute is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Notes
-
-
- The Note tab provides a place to
- record various information about the source that does not
- fit neatly into other categories. This area is
- particularly useful for recording information that does
- not naturally fit into the "Parameter/Value" pairs
- available to Attributes. To add a note or modify existing
- notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- References
-
-
- The References tab indicates any
- database records that refer to a given media object. The
- list can be ordered according to any of its column
- headings: Type,
- ID, or
- Name. Double-clicking an entry allows
- you to view and edit the corresponding record.
-
-
-
- Only primary objects can be shown in the
- References tab: Person, Family,
- Event, Source, or Place. The secondary objects such as
- Names and Attributes, although able to refer the media
- object, will only show up through their primary objects
- to which they belong.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Editing Information About Events
-
- Events are edited through the Event
- Editor dialog. This dialog can be accessed from
- either the Edit Person dialog or the
- Marriage/Relationship dialog.
-
-
-
- Event Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Event Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The central part of the window displays five notebook tabs
- containing different categories of information. Click a tab to
- view or edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
- OK and Cancel
- buttons. Clicking OK will apply all the
- changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking
- the Cancel button will close the window
- without applying any changes.
-
-
-
-
- If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
- data. If not, it has no data.
-
-
-
-
- The tabs provide the following information categories of
- the event data:
-
-
-
- General
-
-
- The General tab lets you view and
- edit basic information about the event: its
- Type, Date,
- Place, Cause,
- and Description. You can type this
- information directly into the adjacent fields. The type
- can be selected from available types listed in the Event
- type drop-down menu. The rest of the information can be
- typed in the appropriate text entry fields. Checking the
- Private record box marks the event record as private and
- allows it to be omitted from reports.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources
-
-
- The Sources tab lets you view and
- edit sources relevant to an event. The central part of the
- window lists all such source references stored in the
- database. The buttons +,
- Edit, and -
- let you add, modify, and remove a source reference
- associated with a place. Note that the
- Edit and -
- buttons become available only when a source reference is
- selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Note
-
-
- The Note tab provides a place to
- record notes or comments about the event. To add a note or
- modify existing notes simply edit the text in the text
- entry field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Witnesses
-
-
- The Witnesses tab lets you view and
- edit witnesses to the event. The central part of the
- window lists all such witnesses stored in the
- database. The buttons +,
- Edit, and -
- let you add, modify, and remove a witness reference to
- this event (see ). Note
- that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Editing Source References
-
-
- Source references connect a Source to another object and allow
- you to provide additional information about the source. When
- adding source references to events, places, etc., the following
- dialog appears:
-
-
-
-
- Source Information dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Source Information dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The dialog includes two main headings, Source
- selection and Source
- details. Source selection
- displays the Title of the Source, its
- Author, and Publication
- information. The Title can be
- selected from the available sources listed in the drop-down
- menu. If the source you are referencing is not already in the
- database, you can enter it by clicking
- New... and filling out the invoked
- Source Editor dialog.
-
- The Source details section indicates the
- details associated with the particular reference to this Source:
- Confidence,
- Volume/Film/Page,
- Date, Text, and
- Comments. You can choose the Confidence
- level from the Confidence drop-down
- menu. The remaining details can be typed in the corresponding
- text entry fields.
-
-
-
-
- Information in this dialog is specific to the particular
- reference. A single source can be referenced many times,
- and all such references will have in common the overall
- source information. This dialog lets you provide
- reference-specific data, such as relevant quotes, comments,
- confidence, page numbers, etc., to further specify and
- document the reference.
-
-
-
-
-
- Names
-
- Names are edited through the following Name
- Editor dialog:
-
-
-
- Name Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Name Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The top of the window shows the dialog title including the
- name of the person whose name is being edited. The central
- part of the window displays three notebook tabs containing
- different categories of available information. You can bring
- any tab to the top for viewing or editing by clicking on the
- appropriate tab heading. The bottom part has
- OK and Cancel
- buttons. Clicking the OK button at any
- time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
- dialog window. Clicking the Cancel
- button at any time will close the window without applying any
- changes.
-
-
-
-
-
- The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
- information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
- boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears
- regular (not bold).
-
-
-
-
-
- The tabs provide the following information categories of the
- name data:
-
-
-
-
-
- General
-
-
-
-
- The General tab allows editing of
- general information about the name: given name, family
- name, patronymic (a form of father's name used in some
- languages, e.g. Russian), family prefix, suffix, title,
- and type of the name. The information can be typed in
- the appropriate text entry fields. The family name and
- the type can be also selected from available choices
- listed in the appropriate drop-down menus.
- Options allow you to adjust
- specific grouping, sorting, and displaying properties of
- this name, as well as to provide the date corresponding
- to the name. The Grouping field
- provides an alternative grouping node for a given name,
- overriding the default grouping based on the family
- name. This may be necessary with similar family names
- that need to be grouped together -- for example Russian
- names Ivanov and Ivanova are considered the same, but
- difference in gender is reflected in different
- spelling. To enable typing into this field, check the
- Override check button. The
- Sort as and Display
- as determine the manner in which the name
- appears in the People View and in the reports. The
- Date can provide information on the
- validity of this name -- use spans as necessary. Check
- the Private record box to mark this
- name record as private. This will give you a chance to
- omit this name from being included in reports, if you
- choose so among the report generation options.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources
-
-
-
-
- The Sources tab displays
- information about sources relevant to this name and
- controls allowing its modification. The central part
- displays the list of all such sources' references stored
- in the database. The buttons +,
- Edit, and
- - allow you to correspondingly
- add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
- name. Note that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when a source reference is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Note
-
-
-
-
- The Note tab displays any notes
- concerning the name. To add a note or modify existing
- notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.
-
-
-
-
- The Format option allows you to set
- the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
- reports and web pages). Selecting
- Flowed will replace all multiple
- spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
- single space in the output. The two consecutive new
- lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
- Selecting Preformatted will honor
- all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
- output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
- field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
- Attributes are edited through the following
- Attribute Editor dialog:
-
-
- Attribute Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Attribute Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The top of the window shows the dialog title including the
- name of the person whose attribute is being edited. The
- central part of the window displays three notebook tabs
- containing different categories of available information. You
- can bring any tab to the top for viewing or editing by
- clicking on the appropriate tab heading. The bottom part has
- OK and Cancel
- buttons. Clicking the OK button at any
- time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
- dialog window. Clicking the Cancel
- button at any time will close the window without applying any
- changes.
-
-
-
-
-
- The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
- information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
- boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears
- regular (not bold).
-
-
-
- The tabs provide the following information categories of
- the attribute data:
-
-
-
- General
-
-
-
-
- The General tab allows editing of
- the most general information about the attribute: name
- of the attribute and its value. The information can be
- typed in the appropriate text entry fields. The
- attribute name can also be selected from available
- choices (if any) listed in the Attribute
- drop-down menu. Check the Private
- record box to mark this attribute record as
- private. This will give you a chance to omit this
- attribute from being included in the reports, if you
- choose so among the report generation options.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources
-
-
-
-
- The Sources tab displays
- information about sources relevant to this attribute and
- controls allowing its modification. The central part
- displays the list of all such sources references stored
- in the database. The buttons +,
- Edit, and
- - allow you to correspondingly
- add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
- attribute. Note that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when a source reference is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Note
-
-
-
-
- The Note tab displays any notes
- concerning the attribute. To add a note or modify
- existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
- field.
-
-
-
-
- The Format option allows you to set
- the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
- reports and web pages). Selecting
- Flowed will replace all multiple
- spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
- single space in the output. The two consecutive new
- lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
- Selecting Preformatted will honor
- all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
- output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
- field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Addresses
- Addresses are edited through the following
- Address Editor dialog:
-
-
-
- Address Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Address Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The top of the window shows the dialog title including the
- name of the person whose address is being edited. The central
- part of the window displays three notebook tabs containing
- different categories of available information. You can bring
- any tab to the top for viewing or editing by clicking on the
- appropriate tab heading. The bottom part has
- OK and Cancel
- buttons. Clicking the OK button at any
- time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
- dialog window. Clicking the Cancel
- button at any time will close the window without applying any
- changes.
-
-
-
-
-
- The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
- information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
- boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears
- regular (not bold).
-
-
-
-
-
- The tabs provide the following information categories of the
- address data:
-
-
-
-
-
- General
-
-
-
-
- The General tab allows editing of
- the most general information about the address: date,
- street address, city or county, state or province,
- country, the postal code, and the phone number. The
- information can be typed in the appropriate text entry
- fields. Check the Private record
- box to mark this address record as private. This will
- give you a chance to omit this address from being
- included in reports, if you choose so among the report
- generation options.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources
-
-
-
-
- The Sources tab displays
- information about sources relevant to this address and
- controls allowing its modification. The central part
- displays the list of all such sources references stored
- in the database. The buttons +,
- Edit, and
- - allow you to correspondingly
- add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
- address. Note that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when a source reference is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Note
-
-
-
-
- The Note tab displays any notes
- concerning the address. To add a note or modify existing
- notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.
-
-
-
-
- The Format option allows you to set
- the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
- reports and web pages). Selecting
- Flowed will replace all multiple
- spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
- single space in the output. The two consecutive new
- lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
- Selecting Preformatted will honor
- all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
- output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
- field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Witnesses
-
- Witnesses are edited through the following Witness
- Editor dialog:
-
-
-
- Witness Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Witness Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The top of the window shows the dialog title. The central part
- of the window displays information about the witness. The
- bottom part has OK and
- Cancel buttons. Clicking the
- OK button at any time will apply all
- the changes made and close the dialog window. Clicking the
- Cancel button at any time will close
- the window without applying any changes.
-
-
-
-
- The witness name can be entered in two ways, depending upon
- whether the witness is a person already stored in the database
- or not (unrelated person).
-
-
-
-
-
- If the person you would like to add as a witness is in fact
- a member of the database, it is better to use the first
- method below.
-
-
-
-
-
- Person from the database
-
-
-
- If the person's data are stored in a database, check
- Person is in the database box. Then
- click the Select button to invoke
- Select Person dialog. Choose the
- person from that dialog and click the
- OK button. The
- Person text field will display the
- name of the person you selected.
-
-
-
-
-
- Even though the person's name is displayed in the
- Person field, it is not available
- for direct editing.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Unrelated person
-
-
-
- If the person is not in the database, make sure that
- Person is in the database box is
- unchecked. Then enter the name or any description of a
- person into the Person text entry
- field. This information is stored as entered, and this
- is the only place it is stored. In other words, there
- is no reference to that person in the entire database
- except for this witness reference. If the person is in
- fact a member of the database, it is advised to use the
- former method.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The Comment text area allows you to enter
- any comments concerning the witness. To add a comment or to
- modify existing comments simply edit the text in the text
- area.
-
-
-
-
-
- Merging records
-
-
- Sometime several records in the database turn out to be
- describing the same object: same person, same place, or same
- source. It could happen either when the data is entered twice
- by mistake, or when new information reveals that the two
- entries refer to the same person. It can also happen after
- importing GEDCOM obtained from a relative, whose database
- overlaps with your existing data.
-
-
-
-
- Whenever you detect duplicate records, merging them a useful
- way of correcting the situation.
-
-
-
-
-
- To make a merge, exactly two records have to be selected in
- the appropriate view (People View, Sources View, or Places
- View). This is accomplished by selecting one entry and then
- selecting another person while holding down
- Ctrl key.
-
-
-
-
- Merge People
-
-
- There are two ways of merging personal records:
- Compare and Merge and Fast
- Merge, both available from the
- Edit menu.
-
-
-
-
-
- Merging people does not discard any information with
- either method. The decisions you make during the merge
- only affect which data will become primary and which will
- become secondary for the resulting merged record.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Compare and Merge
-
-
-
-
- When exactly two people are selected, choose
- EditCompare
- and Merge... to invoke
- Compare People dialog.
-
-
-
-
- Compare People dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Compare People dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or
- not the selected records should be merged. If you
- decide that the records should not be merged, despite
- similar names, you may click
- Cancel to close the dialog
- without making any changes. If you decide to proceed
- with merging, select the appropriate
- Select radio button to specify
- the record to be used as the source of primary data,
- then click Merge and close.
-
-
-
-
- The data from the other record will be kept as
- alternate data. Specifically, all names from the other
- record will become alternate names of the merged
- record. Similarly, parents, spouses, and children of
- the other record will become alternate parents,
- spouses, and children of the merged record, and so on.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Fast Merge
-
-
-
-
- When exactly two people are selected, choose
- EditFast
- Merge to invoke
- Merge People dialog.
-
-
-
- Merge People dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Merge People dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The dialog allows you to quickly merge two records,
- specifying the record to be used as the source of
- primary data. The data from the other record will be
- kept as alternate data. Specifically, all names from
- the other record will become alternate names of the
- merged record. Similarly, parents, spouses, and
- children of the other record will become alternate
- parents, spouses, and children of the merged record,
- and so on.
-
-
-
-
-
- If you are not certain whether or not you need to
- merge the records, or which record to specify as the
- source of primary data, use Compare and
- Merge method described above..
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Merge Sources
-
-
- When exactly two sources are selected, choose
-
- Edit
- Compare and Merge...
- to invoke Merge
-
- Sources dialog.
-
-
-
-
- Merge Sources dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Merge Sources dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or not
- the selected records should be merged. If you decide that
- the records should not be merged, despite similar titles,
- you may click Cancel to close the
- dialog without making any changes. If you decide to proceed
- with merging, choose the appropriate radio button to specify
- the title, author, abbreviated title, publication
- information, and the ID to be used for the merged record,
- then click OK.
-
-
-
-
- Merge Places
-
-
- When exactly two places are selected, choose
-
- Edit
- Compare and Merge...
-
-
- to invoke Select title dialog.
-
-
-
- Merge Places dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Select title dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or not
- the selected records should be merged. If you decide that
- the records should not be merged, despite similar titles,
- you may click Cancel to close the
- dialog without making any changes. If you decide to proceed
- with merging, choose the appropriate radio button to specify
- the title of the merged record, or specify
- Other and enter new text, then click
- OK.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Navigation
-
-
- As long as any database is open, &app; is focused on a single
- person usually referred to as an Active person. This allows
- you to view or modify the data concerning this person, his or
- her immediate family, etc. Navigating in the database (i.e.
- moving from person to person) is in fact nothing else but
- changing the Active person. This section describes many
- alternative ways to navigate through the database using both
- the complex and the convenient interfaces &app; provides. All
- these ways eventually accomplish the same thing, but some are
- more convenient than others, depending what you are doing in
- &app; at the moment.
-
-
-
-
- Using the People View
-
-
- The most intuitive way to select an active person is to use
- the People View (see ). When in
- the People View, just select the name of the desired person
- from the list by clicking that list entry. The person you have
- selected becomes active. The statusbar updates to reflect the
- change of the active person.
-
-
-
-
-
- Using the Family View
-
-
- When in the Family View (see ),
- you can easily navigate between the members of the displayed
- family as follows:
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To make the currently selected spouse the active person,
- click the double-arrow button to the right of the active
- person box. Alternatively, right-click into the spouse
- box and select Make the selected spouse an
- active person item from the context menu.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To make the currently selected parents the active family
- (thereby making father the active person and mother the
- selected spouse), click the right-arrow button to the
- right of the active person's parents box. Alternatively,
- right-click into the active person's parents box and
- select Make the selected parents the active
- family item from the context menu.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To make the currently selected spouse's parents the active
- family (thereby making father the active person and mother
- the selected spouse), click the right-arrow button to the
- right of the spouse's parents box. Alternatively,
- right-click into the spouse's parents box and select
- Make the selected parents the active
- family item from the context menu.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To make the currently selected child the active person,
- click the left-arrow button to the right of the children
- box. Alternatively, right-click into the children box and
- select Make the selected child an active
- person item from the context menu.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- In addition to this, &app; provides an extensive set of
- keyboard navigation options. The detailed reference to the key
- bindings is found in the .
-
-
-
-
-
- Using the Pedigree View
-
-
- The Pedigree View (see ) also
- allows you to move along the family tree. The benefit of this
- method is that you can see more than one generation of the
- family tree. Also, you can jump directly from a great-grandson
- to a great-grandfather without going through the intermediate
- generations.
-
-
-
-
- Note that after changing the active person in the Pedigree
- View, the display is re-adjusted to show four generations,
- starting from the newly selected Active person. When in the
- Pedigree View, you can easily navigate between the members of
- the displayed family tree as follows:
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To make any displayed person the active person,
- double-click the line that connects to the left side of
- the corresponding box.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To make a child of the currently active person (if any)
- the active person, click the left arrow button to the left
- of the corresponding box. If there is more than one child,
- the button expands to the menu listing the children to
- choose from.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To move the whole family tree one generation back, click
- on the corresponding right arrow button on the right-hand
- side of the display area. Clicking the upper button will
- move the tree along the paternal line. Clicking the lower
- button will move the tree along the maternal line.
-
-
-
-
- Clicking either of these buttons is completely equivalent
- to double-clicking the lines connecting to the left of the
- corresponding boxes for father and mother.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- You can also quickly access any of the spouses, siblings,
- children, or parents of any displayed person. To do this, move
- the mouse over the desired person's box and right-click to
- invoke a context menu. The appropriate menu items will contain
- submenus listing all spouses, siblings, children, and parents
- of the corresponding person.
-
-
-
- Advantages of using right-click menus
-
-
- Direct access to spouse and siblings
-
-
-
-
- Complete lists of all member of all categories, not only
- the preferred members.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Setting the Home Person
-
-
- One and only one person in the database can be selected as the
- Home person. Once the Home person is selected, moving to that
- person becomes a matter of a single click, regardless of which
- view you are using at the moment.
-
-
-
-
- To set the Home person, first navigate to that person using
- any method you like. Then choose
-
-
- Edit
- Set Home person
- .
-
- Once this is done, you can move to the Home person from
- anywhere in the database by simply clicking the
- Home icon on the toolbar. You can also
- choose
-
-
- Go
- Home
-
-
- from the menu or select Home item from
- any context menu available on the right click.
-
-
-
-
-
- Using history-based tools
-
-
- &app; also features a powerful set of history-based navigation
- tools. These tools are similar to those commonly used in web
- browsers. They include Back and
- Forward items available from the
-
-
- Go
-
-
- menu, context menus (available in People, Family, and Pedigree
- views), and the toolbar buttons. They also include the list of
- the recent selections available under the
-
-
- Go
-
-
- menu that allows you to jump directly to any of the recent
- selections. Finally, right-clicking on the
- Back and Forward
- toolbar buttons invokes the popup menu with corresponding
- portion of the history. Select any item from the menu to jump
- directly to it.
-
-
-
-
-
- Bookmarking People
-
-
- Similar to setting the Home person, you can bookmark other
- people from the database to simplify further navigation. To bookmark
- a person, first navigate to that person, then choose
-
-
- Bookmarks
- Add bookmark
- .
-
- To move to that person from anywhere in the database, choose
-
-
- Bookmarks
- Go to bookmark
-
- Person's name
-
- .
-
-
-
-
- You can manage your bookmarks by choosing
-
-
- Bookmarks
- Edit bookmarks...
- .
-
- This opens the following Edit Bookmarks
- dialog with the list of bookmarks and the controls to modify
- this list.
-
-
-
-
- Edit Bookmarks dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Edit Bookmarks dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Finding records
-
-
- To find a record in a database, first switch to the
- appropriate View that provides the list of the desired
- records: People, Sources, Places, or Media. Then start typing
- the name of a person or the title of a Source, Place, or Media
- object that you are looking for, respectively. You may also
- press Ctrl+F to turn on the search mode, but
- simply staring to type is also enough.
-
-
-
-
- Type-ahead find
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows type-ahead find.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- As you type, the first record in the list that is compatible
- with your input will be selected.
-
-
- Finding People
-
-
- For more complex people searches you may want to use
- filters. Enable filter controls by choosing
-
-
- View
- Filter
- ,
-
- select the desired filter, and click Apply.
- For details, see
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Generating Reports
-
- Reports are the most common form of the output produced by
- genealogical research. The majority of genealogical software
- puts a lot of emphasis on developing nice looking reports. &app;
- is no exception in this regard, offering a choice of a variety
- of reports. &app; can generate reports in a multitude of open
- formats, both text based and graphical. &app; can also produce
- screen based reports that are convenient for viewing a summary
- of your database. Finally, &app; can generate a web site
- suitable for immediate posting on the Internet. All of these are
- almost infinitely flexible. If you wish to modify or extend the
- default format of &app; report, you can design and choose the
- style for each of your reports.
-
-
- All reports can be accessed through the menu by choosing
-
- Reports
-
- Report Type
-
-
- Particular Report
-
- .
- Alternatively, you can browse the complete selection of
- available reports along with their brief descriptions in a
- Report Selection dialog invoked by clicking
- the Reports icon on the toolbar.
-
-
-
- Substitution Values
-
- Many of the graphical reports allow you to customize the
- information on the display. Variable substituions are used
- to substitute date for a particular symbol. There are two
- styles of variables. The difference between the two styles
- is how empty data is handled.
-
-
- The first style of variables are preceeded by a '$'. If
- the variable evaluates to an empty string, the variable is
- replaced with the empty string. The second style of
- variables are preceeded by a '%'. If the variable evaluates
- to an empty string, the line that contains the variable is
- removed from the output.
-
-
-
- $n/%n
-
-
- Displays the person's name in the form of FirstName LastName
-
-
-
-
-
- $N/%N
-
-
- Displays the person's name in the form of LastName, FirstName
-
-
-
-
-
- $i/%i
-
-
- Displays the GRAMPS ID associated with the person.
-
-
-
-
-
- $b/%b
-
-
- Displays the person's date of birth
-
-
-
-
-
- $B/%B
-
-
- Displays the person's place of birth
-
-
-
-
-
- $d/%d
-
-
- Displays the person's date of death
-
-
-
-
-
- $D/%D
-
-
- Displays the person's place of death
-
-
-
-
-
- $s/%s
-
-
- Displays the name of the person's preferred spouse in
- the form of FirstName LastName
-
-
-
-
-
- $S/%S
-
-
- Displays the name of the person's preferred spouse in
- the form of LastName, FirstName.
-
-
-
-
-
- $m/%m
-
-
- Displays the marriage date of the person and the preferred
- spouse.
-
-
-
-
-
- $M/%M
-
-
- Displays the place assocated with the marriage of the
- person and the preferred spouse.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Books
-
-
- Currently, the only available report under this category is
- the Book Report.
-
-
-
-
- The Book Report creates a single document (i.e. a Book)
- containing a collection of graphical and textual reports.
- Consequently, this allows for a very rich set of documents
- that &app; can produce.
-
-
-
-
- When Book Report is selected, the following book configuration
- dialog appears:
-
-
-
-
- Book Report dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Book Report dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The Book name text entry field is used to
- save the book (a set of configured selections) for future use.
- The top pane lists the items available for inclusion in the
- book. The bottom pane lists the currently selected items in
- the order they will appear in the book.
-
-
-
-
- The horizontal set of buttons by the Book
- name field operates on the whole book. Click the
- Clear button to clear all items from
- the current book. Click the Save button
- to save the current book (under the name typed in the
- Book name text entry field) for future
- use.
-
-
-
-
- Saving the book also saves the configuration for each item.
-
-
-
-
- Click the Open button to load the book
- from the list of previously saved books. Finally, click the
- Edit books button to invoke the
- editable list of available books.
-
-
-
-
- The vertical set of buttons to the right of the bottom pane
- operates on the selected book item. Click the
- Add button to add selected item from
- the available list to the current book. Click the
- Remove button to remove an item from
- the current book. Use Up and
- Down to change the items order in the
- current book. Click the Setup button to
- configure the options of the selected item of the current
- book.
-
-
-
-
- The configuration dialogs invoked by
- Setup are item-specific. If you choose
- not to configure the item, same defaults will be used for all
- needed options. The common option for almost all book items is
- the center person: the person on whom the item is
- centered. Thanks to this option, you can create a book with
- items centered on different people (e.g. your mom's and dad's
- ancestors as separate chapters). By default, the center person
- is set to the active person.
-
-
-
-
- Almost all items available for inclusion in the book are
- textual or graphical reports, and are therefore available in
- the form of standalone reports. The exception is the following
- items which are only available as book items:
-
-
-
-
- Title Page
-
-
-
- This item produces a customized Title page. You can
- configure the text of title, subtitle, and the footer of
- the page. An image can be optionally placed between the
- subtitle and the footer. Because of its
- configurability, this item can be used to create title
- pages for the whole book, its chapter, or even a single
- item.
-
-
-
-
-
- Custom Text
-
-
-
- This item produces a page with three paragraphs, each
- containing custom text. The appearance of the text can
- be adjusted by using custom styles. This item was meant
- to be used for epigraphs, dedications, explanations,
- notes, and so forth.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Code Generators
-
-
- This category contains reports that produce code intended to
- be run through the computer, rather than the usual formatted
- output for human reading. The only code generator currently
- available in &app; is the Relationship Graph producing the
- GraphViz description of the graph.
-
-
-
-
- The Relationship Graph creates a complex relationship graph in
- GraphViz format. The GraphViz dot tool can
- transform the graph into postscript, jpeg, png, vrml, svg, and
- other formats. GraphViz tools are freely available from the
- GraphViz
- site. Specific options for this report include filter
- and number of generations considered, as well as several
- GraphViz-specific options related to pagination, color, and
- details of the graph.
-
-
-
-
-
- If you are not interested in GraphViz code itself and just
- want to generate graphical output, &app; can do it for you
- under the hood. Look for Relationship
- Graph in the Graphical Reports category,
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Graphical Reports
-
-
- Graphical reports represent information in forms of charts and
- graphs. Most of the options are common among graphical
- reports, therefore they will be described only once, at the
- end of this section. The few options which are specific to a
- given report will be described directly in that report's
- entry.
-
-
-
-
- The following graphical reports are currently available in
- &app;:
-
-
-
-
- Ancestor Chart
-
-
-
- This report generates the chart of people who are
- ancestors of the Active person. Specific options include
- the number of generations considered and the format of
- the displayed entries.
-
-
-
-
-
- Ancestor Chart (Wall Chart)
-
-
-
- This report is similar to the Ancestor Chart report. It
- provides more options which make it useful for
- generating huge charts suitable for a poster or a wall
- chart. These options include the ability to compress the
- report (getting rid of an empty space) and the option to
- fit the whole chart on to a single page. In the latter
- case, the contents of the chart is scaled down
- appropriately.
-
-
-
-
-
- Descendant Graph
-
-
-
- This report generates a graph of people who are
- descendants of the Active person. Specific options
- include the format of the displayed entries.
-
-
-
-
-
- Fan Chart
-
-
-
- This report produces a chart resembling a fan, with Active
- person in the center, parents the the semicircle next to
- it, grandparents in the next semicircle, and so on, for a
- total of five generations.
-
-
-
-
-
- Relationship Graph
-
-
-
- This report creates a complex relationship graph in
- GraphViz format and then converts into graphical output
- running it through the the GraphViz
- dot tool behind the scene. Specific
- options for this report include filter, options for
- dates and places for the events, and whether to include
- URLs and IDs for individuals and families. There are
- also several GraphViz-specific options related to
- pagination, color, and details of the graph.
-
-
-
-
-
- Statistics Chart
-
-
-
- This report can collect and display a wealth of
- statistical data about your database. Specific options
- include filter, sorting methods, and additional birth-
- and gender-based limit for inclusion into statistics.
- You can also set the minimum number of items to qualify
- for the bar chart, so that the charts with fewer items
- will generate a pie chart instead. The Chart
- Selection tab allows you to check which
- charts you want to include in your report.
-
-
-
-
-
- Timeline Graph
-
-
-
- This report outputs the list of people with their
- lifetimes represented by intervals on a common
- chronological scale. Specific options include filter,
- sorting method, and the title of the report.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Common options for graphical reports are the filename of the
- output, the format of the output, selected style, page size
- and orientation. Optionally, the reports can be immediately
- opened with the default application.
-
-
-
-
-
- The options used in reports are persistent: each report
- remembers its options used last time.
-
-
-
-
-
- Text Reports
-
-
- Text reports represent the desired information as formatted
- text. Most of the options are common among text reports,
- therefore they will be described only once, at the end of this
- section. The options which are specific to a given report will
- be described directly in that report's entry.
-
-
-
-
- The following text reports are currently available in &app;:
-
-
-
-
- Ahnentafel Report
-
-
-
- This report lists the active person and his or her
- ancestors along with their vital data. The people are
- numbered in a special way which is an established
- standard called Ahnentafel. The active person is given
- number 1. His or her father and mother have numbers 2
- and 3, respectively. This rule holds for every person
- while going back in generations: father's parents are
- numbered 4 and 5, and mother's parents are numbered 6
- and 7, fathers always numbered with even and mothers
- with odd numbers. Therefore, for any person having
- number N in this tree, the numbers of father and mother
- are 2N and 2N+1, respectively.
-
-
-
-
-
- Complete Individual Report
-
-
-
- This report provides individual summaries similar to
- that of the Individual Summary report. The advantage of
- this report is the specific filter option. Depending on
- the filter choice (active person only, his or her
- descendants, his or her ancestors, or entire database),
- the report may contain from one to many individual
- summaries. Another option for this report is the
- inclusion of source information when listing events.
-
-
-
-
-
- Comprehensive Ancestors Report
-
-
-
- This report produces a comprehensive description of
- ancestors of the active person. The highlights of this
- report include elaborate layout, images of children,
- present and former spouses, and source
- citations. Specific options: number of backward
- generations to consider, whether to cite sources, and
- whether to break pages between generations.
-
-
-
-
-
- Descendant Report
-
-
-
- This report produces a brief description of descendants
- of the active person. Specific options: number of
- forward generations to consider.
-
-
-
-
-
- Detailed Ancestral Report
-
-
-
- This report covers in detail the ancestors of the active
- person. It includes vital data (birth and death) as well
- as marriages. Specific options: number of backward
- generations to consider, as well as a variety of options
- regarding the exact contents to include.
-
-
-
-
-
- Detailed Descendant Report
-
-
-
- This report covers in detail the descendants of the
- active person. It includes vital (birth and death)
- information as well as marriages. Specific options:
- number of forward generations to consider.
-
-
-
-
-
- FTM Style Ancestral Report
-
-
-
- This report creates an ancestral report similar to that
- produced by the Family Tree Maker (tm) program. It
- covers in detail the active person and his/her ancestors
- It includes vital information as well as marriages,
- children, and notes. Specific options: number of
- backward generations to consider.
-
-
-
-
-
- FTM Style Descendant Report
-
-
-
- This report creates a descendant report similar to that
- produced by the Family Tree Maker (tm) program. It
- covers in detail the active person and his/her
- descendants. It includes vital information as well as
- marriages, children, and notes. Specific options: number
- of forward generations to consider.
-
-
-
-
-
- Family Group Report
-
-
-
- This creates a family group report, showing information
- on a set of parents and their children. Specific
- options: the spouse (available only if the active person
- has more than one spouse).
-
-
-
-
-
- Individual Summary
-
-
-
- This report produces a detailed summary on the active
- person. The report includes all the facts known to the
- database about that person.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Common options for text reports are the filename of the
- output, the format of the output, selected style, page size
- and orientation. For HTML reports, there is no page
- information. Instead, HTML options include the choice of the
- HTML template, either available in &app; or a custom template
- defined by you. Optionally, the reports can be immediately
- opened with the default application.
-
-
-
- The options used in reports are persistent: each report
- remembers its options used last time.
-
-
-
-
-
- View Reports
-
-
- View reports are representing overall summaries of the
- database information available immediately for on-screen
- viewing. The following view reports are currently available
- in &app;:
-
-
-
-
- Number of ancestors
-
-
-
- This report displays the number of ancestors of the
- active person.
-
-
-
-
-
- Summary of the database
-
-
-
- This report displays the overall statistics concerning
- number of individuals of each gender, various incomplete
- entries statistics, as well as family and media
- statistics.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Web Page
- The only available report in this category
- is the Narrative Web Site report. It generates a
- web site (that is, a set of linked web pages), for
- a set of selected individuals.
-
-
-
- Narrative Web Site
-
-
-
- Introduction
-
-
- &app; 2.0.6 introduced the Narrative Web generator.
- The new tool provides considerably more functionality
- than the older web generator. Instead of using HTML
- templates to customize the pages, CSS style sheets are used.
-
-
-
- More information is now displayed about each person,
- along with information about sources, places, and media
- objects. Introduction pages can be added to provide additional
- information, such as family history.
-
-
-
- Selecting the output
-
-
- Genealogy records can generate a lot of files. Many web
- servers have a difficult time with many files in a single
- directory. The Narrative Web Generator strives to keep the
- number of files per directory to a managable level. To do
- this, a hierarchy of directores is created. The generated
- files names are not intuitive, but are unique per person.
- Subsequent runs will geneate identical file names, making
- it easy to replace files.
-
-
- By default, the output files are written to the specified
- directory. Because of the number of files and directories
- that are created, it may be difficult to transfer the files
- to an external web host. To aid in this, you may directly
- create a gzip'd tar file to more easily upload the data.
- This is the format that should be used if you would like
- to take advantage of the free genealogy page hosting at the
- GRAMPS web hosting site.
-
- To select the gzip'd tar file, select the Store
- web pages in .tar.gz archive option.
-
-
-
- Applying a filter
-
-
- Like the previous web page generator, and most of the other
- &app; reports, you can control what is included in the output
- by choosing a filter. Several default filters are provided for
- you, but you are free to use the Custom Filter Editor tool to
- create your own.
-
- Any person matching this filter who is not excluded due
- to the privacy rules, will be included in the output. The default
- filter includes all people in the database.
-
-
-
- Applying a style sheet
-
- GRAMPS provides six built in style sheets for your web page.
- Each of these style sheets produces a unique look for your pages.
- The generated style sheet is named narrative.css.
- You may edit this file if you wish to further customize your
- site.
-
-
- If you make modifications to your style sheet, you need to be aware
- the regenerating the pages with the same output directory will
- overwrite your changes to this file. To prevent this from happening,
- make sure you choose No style sheet for subsequent
- runs.
-
-
-
- Character set encoding
-
-
- Because of GRAMPS internationalization ability, the default character
- set for the HTML pages is UTF-8. This provides support for virtually
- all characters.
-
- The Apache web server is sometimes misconfigured to override
- the character set specified in an HTML page. This causes problems with
- the UTF-8 character set generated by GRAMPS, distorting characters on
- the screen.
-
- If your web server is misconfigured and you do not have priveledge
- to fix the configururation, you may solve this problem by overriding the
- default character set to match what your web server may be expecting.
-
-
-
- Copyright notice
-
- International copyright law reserves all rights to your data.
- You own the data, and people must get your permission to use it.
- In genealogy, however, sharing data is a common ideal. It this case, you
- may wish to grant the user more rights.
-
- While the default for GRAMPS is to place a notice indicating that
- all rights are reserved, we give you the option to place your site under
- one of several of the Create Commons licenses. With a Creative Commons
- license, you grant user's certain permission to use your data without
- requiring them to contact you directly for permission.
-
- See the Creative
- Commons web site for more information.
-
-
-
- Controlling page generation
-
- Three additional pages can be generated by the web page generator.
- The Home page is a page that will display an image and a whatever text
- you wish. To enable this page, choose a Media Object
- from the Home Media/Note ID menu on the Page
- Generation tab. If the Media Object contains an image, the image
- is displayed at the top of the page. If the Media Object contains a Note,
- the Note's text is used for the text of the page. A second page, the
- Introduction page, works similarly. Just choose the Media Object in the
- Introduction Media/Note ID menu.
-
- If you choose to include a contact page, the researcher information
- stored in the database is displayed, along with the information specified
- in the Publisher contact/Note ID menu. Please use
- this page with caution,
- since you may consider your contact information to be private.
-
-
-
- Privacy
-
- Privacy of personal information is an important issue on the web
- today. &app; tries to give you control over the information that is presented.
-
-
- &app; provides two options to control the privacy of your information.
- If you select the Do not include records marked private
- option, any data that is marked as private will not be displayed on the
- generated site. If you select Restrict information on living people,
- &app; will attempt to determine which people have the potential of still
- being alive, and will omit these people from the database. Some countries
- have laws that indicate that a certain number of years must pass after
- someone's death before information can be published. The Years
- to restrict from person's death option allows you to specifiy
- how many years a person must be deceased before the information is included.
-
-
- Please note that it is your responsibility to double check all
- information in the pages for any privacy information. &app; cannot be held
- responsible for any privacy issues.
-
-
-
- Adding custom code your pages
-
- If you are not interested in customizing your pages, you may skip
- the section.
-
- The previous web generator allowed you to customize your pages
- using HTML templates. Your data would be substituted for certain markers
- in the code.
-
- This method proved to be too cumbersome for most users. The Narrative
- Web Page Generator introduces a simpler mechanism. On the Page
- Generation tab, you may specify text (including HTML code) that
- will be inserted into each page, separately for the header and the
- footer.
-
- To create this code, you need to create a Media Object marked as an
- internal note. To create this, add a new Media Object in the Media View,
- and select the internal note option. You may then enter your HTML code.
-
-
-
- To insert the code from the internal notes into the web pages,
- select the appropriate Media Objects from the HTML user
- header and HTML user footer menus.
- Two div sections will be added to the pages - userheader and userfooter.
- The corresponding HTML code is inserted into the HTML page surrounded by div
- markers. You can customize your style sheet to provide additional formatting
- and positioning information to control these sections.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Running Tools
-
-
- &app; tools allow you to perform various types of analysis of
- your genealogical data. Typically, the tools do not produce
- output in form of printouts or files. Instead, they produce
- screen output immediately available for the
- researcher. However, when appropriate, you can save the
- results of running a tool into a file. Tools present one of
- the major strengths of &app; compared to the most genealogical
- software.
-
-
-
-
- The tools can be accessed through the menu by choosing
-
-
- Tools
-
- Tool Section
-
-
- Particular Tool
-
- .
-
- Alternatively, you can browse the complete selection of
- available tools along with their brief descriptions in a
- Tool Selection dialog invoked by clicking
- the Tools icon on the toolbar.
-
-
-
-
- Analysis and Exploration
-
-
- This section contains tools which analyze and explore the
- database, but do not alter it. The following analysis and exploration
- tools are currently available in &app;:
-
-
-
-
- Compare individual events
-
-
-
- This tool compares events across the selected group of
- people. The people for this comparison are chosen with
- the use of custom filters. The custom filters can be
- created in the Custom Filter Editor (see ) that can be invoked by
- clicking the Custom Filter Editor
- button. The resulting table produced by this tool can be
- saved as a spreadsheet.
-
-
-
-
-
- Interactive descendant browser
-
-
-
- This tool builds a tree with the active person being the
- root. Children branch from their parents in the usual
- manner. Use this tool for a quick glance of a person's
- descendants.
-
-
-
-
- Double-clicking on tree node will bring up the
- Edit Person dialog allowing to
- view or modify the personal data.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Database Processing
-
-
- This section contains tools which may modify your database.
- The tools from this section are used mostly for finding and
- correcting errors in the data. The following database
- processing tools are currently available in &app;:
-
-
-
-
-
- The modifications will only be performed upon your explicit
- consent, except for the automatic fixes performed by
- Check and repair database tool.
-
-
-
-
-
- Check and repair database
-
-
-
- This tool checks the database for integrity problems,
- fixing the problems it can. Specifically, the tool is
- checking for:
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Broken family links. These are the cases when a
- person's record refers to a family while the
- family's record does not refer to that person, and
- vice versa.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Missing media objects. The missing media object is
- the object whose file is referenced in the database
- but does not exist. This can happen when the file is
- accidentally deleted, renamed, or moved to another
- location.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Empty families. These are the family entries which
- have no reference to any person as their member.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Parent relationship. This checks all families to
- ensure that father and mother are not mixed up. The
- check is also made that parents have different
- gender. If they have common gender then their
- relationship is renamed to "Partners".
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Extract information from names
-
-
-
- This tool searches the entire database and attempts to
- extract titles and nicknames that may be embedded in a
- person's Given name field. If any
- information could be extracted, the candidates for
- fixing will be presented in the table. You may then
- decide which to repair as suggested and which not to.
-
-
-
-
-
- Find possible duplicate people
-
-
-
- This tool searches the entire database, looking for the
- entries that may represent the same person.
-
-
-
-
-
- Fix capitalization of family names
-
-
-
- This tool searches the entire database and attempts to
- fix the capitalization of family names. The aim is to
- have conventional capitalization: capital first letter
- and lower case for the rest of the family name. If
- deviations from this rule are detected, the candidates
- for fixing will be presented in the table. You may then
- decide which to repair as suggested and which not to.
-
-
-
-
-
- Rename personal event types
-
-
-
- This tool allows all the events of a certain name
- to be renamed to a new name.
-
-
-
-
-
- Reorder &app; IDs
-
-
- This tool reorders the &app; IDs according to the
- defaults of &app;.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Debug
-
-
- This section contains debugging tools that are not of general
- interest for many of the users of &app;. If you're not
- interested in debugging or developing &app; you may safely
- skip this section.
-
-
-
-
- Python evaluation window
-
-
-
- Enter expression into the Evaluation
- Window, get the output in Output
- Window. Any errors should end up in the
- Error Window.
-
-
-
-
-
- Reload plugins
-
-
- Makes an attempt to reload all plugins.
-
-
-
- This tool is itself a plugin, but it will not reload itself!
-
-
-
-
-
- Show uncollected objects
-
-
-
- Provides the window listing all uncollected objects.
- Depending on the system settings, recently abandoned GUI
- objects may still be uncollected.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Utilities
-
-
- This section contains tools allowing you to perform a simple
- operation on a portion of data. The results can be saved in
- your database, but they will not modify your existing data.
- The following utilities are currently available in &app;:
-
-
-
- Custom Filter Editor
-
-
- The Custom Filter Editor builds custom filters that can be
- used to select people included in reports, exports, and
- other tools and utilities. This is in fact a very powerful
- tool in genealogical analysis.
-
-
-
-
- When you launch it, the User defined
- filters dialog appears that lists all the filters
- (if any) previously defined by you. Click the
- Add... button to define a new filter.
- Once you have designed your filters, you can edit, test, and
- delete selected filters using the
- Edit...,
- Test..., and
- Delete buttons, respectively. All the
- filters displayed in the list will be automatically saved
- along with your database and will be available with
- subsequent sessions of &app;.
-
-
-
-
-
- The changes made to the filters only take effect when you
- click the Apply and close button.
-
-
-
-
-
- Clicking the Add... button invokes the
- following Define filter dialog:
-
-
-
-
- Define filter dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Define filter dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Type the name for your new filter into the
- Name field. Enter any comment that
- would help you identify this filter in the future into the
- Comment field. Add as many rules to the
- Rule list as you would like to your
- filter using Add... button. If the
- filter has more than one rule, select one of the
- Rule operations. This allows you to
- choose whether all rules must apply, only one (either) rule
- must apply, or exactly one (either) rule must apply, in
- order for the filter to generate a match. If your filter has
- only one rule, this selection has no effect.
-
-
-
-
- Check Return values that do not match the filter
- rules to invert the filter rule. For example,
- inverting "has a common ancestor with I1" rule will match
- everyone who does not have a common ancestor with that
- person).
-
-
-
-
- Clicking the Add... button invokes
- the following Add Rule dialog:
-
-
-
-
- Add Rule dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Add Rule dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The pane on the left-hand side displays available filter
- rules arranged by their categories in an expandable
- tree. For detailed filter rule reference, see . Click on the arrows to
- fold/unfold the appropriate category. Select the rule from
- the tree by clicking on its name. The right-hand side
- displays the name, the description, and the values for the
- currently selected rule. Once you are satisfied with your
- rule selection and its values, click
- OK to add this rule to the rule list
- of the currently edited filter. Clicking
- Cancel will abort adding the rule to
- the filter.
-
-
-
-
-
- A filter you have already designed may be used as a rule
- for another filter. This gives you nearly infinite
- flexibility in custom-tailoring your selection criteria
- that can be later used in most of the exports, reports,
- and some of the tools (such as comparing individual
- events).
-
-
-
-
-
- Scratch Pad
-
-
- This tool provides a temporary note pad to store database
- records for easy reuse. In short, this is a sort of the
- copy-and-paste functionality extended from textual objects
- to other types of records used in &app;.
-
-
-
-
- Scratch Pad makes extensive use of drag-and-drop technique.
-
-
-
- To invoke Scratch Pad, either choose
-
-
- Tools
- Utilities
- Scratch Pad
-
-
- or click the ScratchPad button on the
- toolbar. The following window will appear:
-
-
-
-
- Scratch Pad tool
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Add Scratch Pad tool.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Scratch Pad supports addresses, attributes (both personal
- and family), events (both personal and family), names, media
- objects references, source references, URLs, and of course
- textual information of notes and comments. To store any type
- of these records, simply drag the existing record on to the
- Scratch Pad from the corresponding editor dialog. To reuse
- the record, drag it from the Scratch Pad on to the
- corresponding place in the editor, e.g. Address tab,
- Attribute tab, etc.
-
-
-
-
-
- Some objects are showing the link icon on the left. This
- indicates that dragging such selection will produce a
- reference to an existing object, not copy the object
- itself.
-
-
-
-
- For example, the media object file will not be duplicated.
- Instead, the reference will be made to an existing media
- object, which will result in the local gallery entry.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Scratch Pad storage is persistent within a single &app;
- session. Closing the window will not lose the stored
- records. However, exiting &app; will.
-
-
-
-
-
- Other tools
-
-
- Generate SoundEx codes
-
-
-
- This utility generates SoundEx codes for the names of
- people in the database. Please visit the NARA Soundex Indexing page to
- learn more about Soundex Indexing System.
-
-
-
-
-
- Relationship calculator
-
-
-
- This utility calculates and displays the relationship
- of any person to the active person.
-
-
-
-
-
- Verify the database
-
-
-
- This utility allows you to verify the database based
- on the set of criteria specified by you.
-
-
-
-
-
- Difference between Verify tool and previously
- described Check tool
-
-
-
-
- The Check tool detects inconsistencies in the
- database structure. The Verify tool, however, is
- detecting the records that do not satisfy your
- particular criteria.
-
-
-
-
-
- For example, you may want to make sure that nobody in
- your database had children at the age of 98. Based on
- common sense, such a record would indicate an
- error. However, it is not a consistency error in the
- database. Besides, someone might have a child at the
- age of 98 (although this rarely happens). The Verify
- tool will display everything that violates your
- criteria so that you can check whether the record is
- erroneous or not. The ultimate decision is yours.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Settings
-
-
- Preferences
-
- Most of the settings in &app;, are configured in the
- Preferences dialog. To invoke it, choose
- Edit
- Preferences....
-
-
- Preferences dialog
-
-
- Shows Preferences dialog.
-
-
- The pane on the left displays the tree of available option
- categories. Selecting a tree node will display the corresponding
- options in the right side of the dialog.
-
-
- Database
- This category contains preferences relevant to the
- database itself. It has the following subcategories:
-
-
- General
-
-
- Automatically
- load last database
- Check this box to automatically load the
- last open database on startup.
-
-
- Family name guessing
- This option affects the initial family name of a
- child when he/she is added to the database.
-
- This option only
- affects the initial family name guessed by &app; when the
- Edit Person dialog is launched. You can modify
- that name the way you see fit. Set this option to the value that you
- will most frequently use, as it will save you a lot of
- typing.
-
- If None is selected, no guessing will be
- attempted. Selecting Father's surname will use
- the family name of the father. Selecting Combination of
- mother's and father's surname will use the father's name
- followed by the mother's name. Finally, Icelandic
- style will use the father's given name followed by the
- "sson" suffix (e.g. the son of Edwin will be guessed as
- Edwinsson).
-
-
-
-
-
-
- GRAMPS IDs
- Enter ID prefixes for various kinds of database
- entries into the corresponding text entry fields.
-
-
- The ID prefixes use formatting conventions common for
- C, Python, and other programming languages. For example, the %04d
- expands to an integer, prepended with zeros to have the total
- width of four digits. If you would like IDs to be 1, 2, 3, etc,
- simply set the formatting parameter to %d.
-
-
-
-
- Researcher Information
- Enter your personal information in the corresponding
- text entry fields. Although &app; requests information about you,
- this information is used only so that &app; can create valid GEDCOM
- output files. A valid GEDCOM file requires information about the file's
- creator. If you choose, you may leave the information empty, however
- none of your exported GEDCOM files will be valid.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Display
- This category contains preferences relevant to
- displaying database records and controls in &app;.
- It has the following subcategories:
-
-
-
- General
-
-
-
-
- Default view
- This determines which view will appear when
- you start &app;. Choose between Person and Family views.
-
-
-
- Family view style
- This selects between the two available styles
- of the Family view layout. The Left to right
- style is similar to the Family Tree Maker (tm), while the
- Top to bottom is similar to the Reunion.
-
-
-
- Always display the LDS ordinance
- tabs
- Check this box to have LDS ordinance tabs
- displayed. If you do not know what LDS is then you probably
- should not check it.
-
- Display Tip of the
- Day
- Check this box to have the Tip
- of the Day dialog appear on every startup.
- The tips are displayed randomly from the large collection
- of information bits on &app;.
-
-
- The Tip of the Day is likely
- to be useful for new user of &app;.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Dates
-
-
- Select the display format for the dates
- from the available formats listed in this menu.
-
-
- Available date display formats are language-specific.
- Depending on whether or not there is a &app; date displayer
- available for your language, you may or may not have a lot of
- choices.
-
-
-
-
-
- Toolbar and Statusbar
-
-
-
-
- Toolbar
- Select the desired appearance of the toolbar
- icons from the menu. Selecting GNOME
- Settings will use the overall settings selected
- for your GNOME desktop.
-
-
-
- Statusbar
- Select the desired contents displayed in the
- statusbar using the radio buttons.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Other settings
-
- Besides Preferences dialog, there are
- other settings available in &app;. For various reasons they have been
- made more readily accessible, as listed below.
-
-
-
- Column Editor
-
- The columns of the list views may be added, removed, or reordered
- in a Column Editor Dialog,
- see . Only checked columns will
- be shown in the view. To change their order, drag any column to its desired place inside
- the editor. Clicking OK will reflect the changes
- in the appropriate view. To invoke Column Editor Dialog,
- choose EditColumn
- Editor....
-
-
-
- The Column Editor is available
- and works in the same way for all list views.
- Specifically, it is available for People View, Family View (children list).
- Sources View, Places View, and Media View.
-
-
-
-
- Setting Home person
- The Home person is the person who becomes active
- when database opened, when Home button is clicked
- or the Home menu item is selected from
- either Go menu or the right-click context menu
- anywhere.
-
- To set Home person, make the desired person active and
- then choose EditSet Home
- person....
-
-
-
-
- Adjusting viewing controls
- Whether the toolbar, the sidebar, or the filter (People View
- only) are displayed in the main window is adjusted through
- the View menu.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Advanced manipulation of settings
-
- The contents of this section is outside the scope
- of interest of a general user of &app;. If you proceed with tweaking
- the options on the low level you may damage your &app; installation.
- Be careful. YOU HAVE BEEN WARNED!
-
-
- By default, &app; stores its settings using gconf2 system.
- All the settings used in this version of &app; are stored in
- subdirectories under /apps/gramps/ in the
- gconf2 namespace. Accessing the keys can be done either using
- gconftool-2 command line tool, or the
- gconf-editor GUI tool.
-
-
- All keys are documented, and the notification mechanisms
- are used as appropriate. Therefore, updating keys from outside
- of &app; should lead to updating &app; in real time, without
- necessarily restarting it.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Keybindings reference
- Most of the standard menu items define equivalent keybindings.
- These are apparent because they are displayed on the right of
- the menu item. However, some keybindings are not associated with
- any items in the menu.
-
- This appendix contains the list of keybindings that are not
- displayed in menus of &app;.
-
-
-
- List Views
- The following bindings are available in all list views:
- People View, Sources View, Places View, and Media View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Key
- Function
-
-
-
-
- Enter
- Invoke Edit Person dialog
- with the selected person.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Family View
- The bindings available in the Family View depend on where the
- focus is. The following tables list the bindings for all focus
- targets.
-
-
-
- Focus on the Active Person
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Key
- Function
-
-
-
-
- Enter
- Invoke Edit Person dialog with
- the active person.
-
-
- Ctrl+Down
- or Ctrl+Right
- Swap the Active Person and the selected spouse.
- Use Ctrl+Down in standard Family View and
- Ctrl+Right in alternative Family
- View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Focus on the Spouse box
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Key
- Function
-
-
-
-
- Enter
- Edit relationship between the Active Person and
- the selected spouse.
-
-
- Shift+Enter
- Edit the personal information for the selected
- spouse.
-
-
- Insert
- Add a person from the database to the spouse
- list.
-
-
- Shift+Insert
- Add a new person to the database and to the spouse
- list.
-
-
- Delete
- Delete the selected spouse from the spouse
- list. The spouse is not deleted from the database.
-
-
- Ctrl+Up
- or Ctrl+Left
- Swap the selected spouse and the Active Person.
- Use Ctrl+Up in standard Family View and
- Ctrl+Left in alternative Family
- View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Focus on the Parents box
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Key
- Function
-
-
-
-
- Enter
- Edit relationship between the parents and their
- child (either the Active Person or the selected spouse, depending
- which parents box the focus is in).
-
-
- Insert
- Add a new set of parents from the database to the
- list.
-
-
- Shift+Insert
- Add a new set of parents to the database and to the
- list.
-
-
- Delete
- Delete the selected parents from the list.
- The parents are not deleted from the database.
-
-
- Ctrl+Right
- or Ctrl+Down
- Make the selected parents the active family.
- Use Ctrl+Right in standard Family View and
- Ctrl+Down in alternative Family
- View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Focus on the Children box
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Key
- Function
-
-
-
-
- Enter
- Edit relationship between the child and his/her
- parents (the Active Person and the selected
- spouse).
-
-
- Shift+Enter
- Edit the personal information for the selected
- child.
-
-
- Insert
- Add a new person from the database to the children
- list.
-
-
- Shift+Insert
- Add a new person to the database and to the children
- list.
-
-
- Delete
- Delete the selected child from the list.
- The child is not deleted from the database.
-
-
- Ctrl+Left
- or Ctrl+Up
- Make the selected child the Active Person.
- Use Ctrl+Left in standard Family View and
- Ctrl+Up in alternative Family
- View.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Filter rules reference
- This appendix lists of all the filter rules currently defined
- in &app;. Each of these rules is available for use when creating custom
- filters, see . The rules are
- listed by their categories.
-
-
-
- General filters
- This category includes the following most general rules:
-
-
-
- Has complete record
- This rule matches all people whose records are
- marked as complete. Currently, the completeness of personal
- information is marked manually, in the Edit Person
- dialog.
-
-
-
- People with incomplete names
- This rule matches all people with either
- given name or family name missing.
-
-
-
- Is bookmarked person
- This rule matches all people who are on the
- bookmark list.
-
-
-
- Has text matching substring of
- This rule matches all people whose records contain
- specified substring. All textual records are searched. Optionally,
- the search can be made case sensitive, or a regular expression
- match.
-
-
-
- Everyone
- This rule matches any person in the database.
- As such it is not very useful on its own except for testing purposes.
- However, it may be useful in combinations with other rules.
-
-
-
- People probably alive
- This rule matches all people whose records do
- not indicate their death and who are not unreasonably old,
- judging by their available birth data and today's date.
-
-
-
- Has a name
- This rule matches any person whose name
- matches the specified value in full or in part. For example,
- Marta Ericsdotter will be matched by the rule using the
- value "eric" for the family name.
-
-
- Separate values can be used for Given name, Family name,
- Suffix, and the Title. The rule returns a match if, and only if,
- all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's
- name. To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
-
-
-
- Has the Id
- This rule matches any person with a specified
- &app; ID. The rule returns a match only if the ID is matched
- exactly.
-
-
- You can either enter the ID into a text entry field, or
- select a person from the list by clicking
- Select... button. In the latter case, the
- ID will appear in the text field after the selection was made.
-
-
-
- Is default person
- This rule matches the default (home) person.
-
-
-
- People marked private
- This rule matches people whose records are marked
- as private.
-
-
-
- Is a female
- This rule matches any female person.
-
-
-
- People who have images
- This rule matches people with images in their
- galleries.
-
-
-
- People without a birth date
- This rule matches people missing birth date.
-
-
-
- Is a male
- This rule matches any male person.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Event filters
- This category includes the following rules that match people
- based on their recorded events:
-
-
- Has the birth
- This rule matches people whose birth event
- matches specified values for Date, Place, and Description.
- The rule returns a match even if the person's birth event matches
- the value partially. The matching rules are case-insensitive.
- For example, anyone born in Sweden will be matched by the rule
- using the value "sw" for the Place.
-
-
- The rule returns a match if, and only if,
- all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's
- birth. To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
-
-
-
- Has the death
- This rule matches people whose death event
- matches specified values for Date, Place, and Description.
- The rule returns a match even if the person's death event
- matches the value partially. The matching rules are case-insensitive.
- For example, anyone who died in Sweden
- will be matched by the rule using the value "sw" for the Place.
-
-
- The rule returns a match if, and only if,
- all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's
- death. To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
-
-
-
- Has source of
- This rule matches people whose records refer
- to the specified source.
-
-
-
- Has the personal event
- This rule matches people that have a personal
- event matching specified values for the Event type, Date, Place,
- and Description. The rule returns a match even if the person's
- event matches the value partially. The matching rules are
- case-insensitive. For example, anyone who graduated
- in Sweden will be matched by the rule using the Graduation event
- and the value "sw" for the Place.
-
-
- The personal events should be selected from a pull-down menu.
- The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty values
- are (partially) matched by the personal event.
- To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
-
-
-
- Has the family event
- This rule matches people that have a family
- event matching specified values for the Event type, Date, Place,
- and Description. The rule returns a match even if the person's
- event matches the value partially. The matching rules are
- case-insensitive. For example, anyone who was married in Sweden
- will be matched by the rule using the Marriage event and the
- value "sw" for the Place.
-
-
- The family events should be selected from a pull-down menu.
- The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty values
- are (partially) matched by the personal event.
- To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
-
-
-
- Witness
- This rule matches people who are present as
- a witness in the event. If the personal or family event type is
- specified, only the events of this type will be searched.
-
-
-
- People with incomplete events
- This rule matches people missing date or place in
- any personal event.
-
-
-
- Families with incomplete events
- This rule matches people missing date or place in
- any family event of any of their families.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Family filters
- This category includes the following rules that match people
- based on their family relationships:
-
-
- People with children
- This rule matches people with children.
-
-
-
- People with multiple marriage records
- This rule matches people with more than one spouse.
-
-
-
- People with no marriage records
- This rule matches people with no spouses.
-
-
-
- People who were adopted
- This rule matches adopted people.
-
-
-
- Has the relationships
- This rule matches people with a particular
- relationship. The relationship must match the type selected from
- the menu. Optionally, the number of relationships and the number
- of children can be specified.
-
-
- The rule returns a match if, and only if,
- all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's
- relationship. To use just one value, leave the other values empty.
-
-
-
- Is spouse of filter match
- This rule matches people married to someone
- who is matched by the specified filter.
- The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
-
-
-
- Is a child of filter match
- This rule matches people for whom either parent
- is matched by the specified filter.
- The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
-
-
-
- Is a parent of filter match
- This rule matches people whose child
- is matched by the specified filter.
- The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
-
-
-
- Is a sibling of filter match
- This rule matches people whose sibling
- is matched by the specified filter.
- The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Ancestral filters
- This category includes the following rules that match people
- based on their ancestral relations to other people:
-
-
- Is an ancestor of
- This rule matches people who are ancestors of the
- specified person. The Inclusive option determines whether the
- specified person should be considered his/her own ancestor (useful
- for building reports).
-
-
- You can either enter the ID into a text entry field, or
- select a person from the list by clicking
- Select... button. In the latter case, the
- ID will appear in the text field after the selection was made.
-
-
-
- Is an ancestor of person at
- least N generations away
- This rule matches people who are ancestors of the
- specified person and are at least N generations away from that person
- in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value of 2
- for the number of generations will match grandparents,
- great-grandparents, etc., but not the parents of the specified
- person.
-
-
-
- Is an ancestor of person not more
- than N generations away
- This rule matches people who are ancestors of the
- specified person and are no more than N generations away from that
- person in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value
- of 2 for the number of generations will match parents and
- grandparents, but not great-grandparents, etc., of the specified
- person.
-
-
-
- Has a common ancestor with
- This rule matches people who have common ancestors
- with the specified person.
-
-
-
- Has a common ancestor with filter match
- This rule matches people who have common ancestors
- with someone who is matched by the specified filter.
- The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
-
-
-
- Is an ancestor of filter match
- This rule matches people who are ancestors
- of someone who is matched by the specified filter.
- The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Descendant filters
- This category includes the following rules that match people
- based on their descendant relations to other people:
-
-
- Is a descendant of
- This rule matches people who are descendants of the
- specified person. The Inclusive option determines whether the
- specified person should be considered his/her own descendant (useful
- for building reports).
-
-
- You can either enter the ID into a text entry field, or
- select a person from the list by clicking
- Select... button. In the latter case, the
- ID will appear in the text field after the selection was made.
-
-
-
- Is a descendant of person at
- least N generations away
- This rule matches people who are descendants of the
- specified person and are at least N generations away from that person
- in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value of 2
- for the number of generations will match grandchildren,
- great-grandchildren, etc., but not the children of the specified
- person.
-
-
-
- Is a descendant of person not more
- than N generations away
- This rule matches people who are descendants of the
- specified person and are no more than N generations away from that
- person in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value
- of 2 for the number of generations will match children and
- grandchildren, but not great-grandchildren, etc., of the specified
- person.
-
-
-
- Is a descendant of filter match
- This rule matches people who are descendants
- of someone who is matched by the specified filter.
- The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
-
-
-
- Is a descendant family member of
- This rule not only matches people who are
- descendants of the specified person, but also those descendants'
- spouses.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Relationship filters
- This category includes the following rules that match people
- based on their mutual relationship:
-
-
- Relationship path between two people
- This rule matches all ancestors of both people
- back to their common ancestors (if exist). This produces the
- "relationship path" between these two people, through
- their common ancestors.
-
-
- You can either enter the ID of each person into the
- appropriate text entry fields, or select people from the list by
- clicking their Select... buttons. In the
- latter case, the ID will appear in the text field after the
- selection was made.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Miscellaneous filters
- This category includes the following rules which do not
- naturally fit into any of the above categories:
-
-
- Has the personal attribute
- This rule matches people who have the personal
- attribute of the specified value. The specified personal attribute
- name should be selected from the menu. The specified value should
- be typed into the text entry field.
-
-
-
- Has the family attribute
- This rule matches people who have the family
- attribute of the specified value. The specified family attribute
- should be selected from the menu. The specified value should be
- typed into the text entry field.
-
-
-
- Matches the filter named
- This rule matches people who are matched
- by the specified filter.
- The specified filter name should be selected from the menu.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Known Bugs and Limitations
-
-The known limitations include the BSDDB performance issues related
-to caching and the memory size. As long as the BSDDB cache fits completely
-into the available memory on the system, the performance should be
-adequate. When the cache size exceeds that of the free memory and
-portions of database cache start to be swapped onto the disk, the performance
-degrades appreciably. This can be solved by adjusting the BSDDB cache
-size for the large databases.
-
-
-
-
-
- About GRAMPS
- &app; was written by Donald N. Allingham
- (don@gramps-project.org).
-
-
- The somewhat incomplete list of contributors includes (in alphabetical order):
-
-
-Larry Allingham
-Larry Allingham, Jr.
-Jens Arvidsson
-Marcos Bedinelli
-Douglas S. Blank
-Radu Bogdan Mare
-Alexander Bogdashevsky
-Richard Bos
-Nathan Bullock
-Lorenzo Cappelletti
-Pier Luigi Cinquantini
-Bruce J. DeGrasse
-Alexandre Duret-Lutz
-Billy C. Earney
-Baruch Even
-Bernd Felsche
-Egyeki Gergely
-Michel Guitel
-Steve Hall
-David R. Hampton
-Martin Hawlisch
-Anton Huber
-Frode Jemtland
-Greg Kuperberg
-Arkadiusz Lipiec
-Lars Kr. Lundin
-Radek Malcic
-Leonid Mamtchenkov
-Tino Meinen
-Frederick Noronha
-Jeffrey C. Ollie
-Donald A. Peterson
-Guillaume Pratte
-Laurent Protois
-Matthieu Pupat
-Trevor Rhodes
-Alexander Roitman
-Jason Salaz
-Julio Sanchez
-Bernd Schandl
-Martin Senftleben
-Gary Shao
-Jim Smart
-Steve Swales
-Eero Tamminen
-Samuel Tardieu
-Richard Taylor
-James Treacy
-Sebastian Voecking
-Xing Wang
-Tim Waugh
-Jesper Zedlitz
-
-If you know of somebody else who should be listed here, please let us know.
-
-
-
- To find more information about &app;, please visit the
- GRAMPS Project
- Web page.
-
- To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding this application or
- this manual, use the help menu in &app;, or follow the directions
- on this site.
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/gramps2/help/C/preface.xml b/gramps2/help/C/preface.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index f4a517fb4..000000000
--- a/gramps2/help/C/preface.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,354 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Preface
-
- GRAMPS is a software package designed for genealogical
- research. Although similar to other genealogical programs, GRAMPS
- offers some unique and powerful features, which we'll discuss
- below.
-
- GRAMPS is a Open Source Software package, which means you
- are free to make copies and distribute it to anyone you like.
- It's developed and maintained by a worldwide team of volunteers
- whose goal is to make GRAMPS powerful, yet easy to use.
-
-
- Why use GRAMPS?
-
- Most genealogy programs allow you to enter information
- about your ancestors and descendants. Typically, they can
- display family relationships through charts, graphs, or
- reports. Some allow you to include pictures or other media. Most
- let you include information about people even if those people
- are not related to the primary family you happen to be
- researching. And they may include features that let you exchange
- data with other programs and print different types of
- reports.
-
- GRAMPS has all these capabilities and more. Notably, it
- allows you to integrate bits and pieces of data as they arise
- from your research and to put them in one place -- your
- computer. You can then use your computer to manipulate,
- correlate, and analyze your data, rather than messing with reams
- of paper.
-
-
-
-
- What's new since 1.0.X
-
- If you are new to GRAMPS, it may not be important for you
- to know how GRAMPS version 2.0.0 (the object of this manual)
- differs from previous versions of the software. You may
- therefore elect to skip this section.
-
- However, if you are already familiar with GRAMPS and are
- interested in the new aspects and features of version 2.0.0,
- please read on.
-
-
-
- Berkeley database backend
-
-
- We've adopted the Berkeley database format (BSDDB) as
- the default for GRAMPS. Berkeley is the most widely used
- open source developer database in the world.
-
- This change allowed us to overcome issues of
- performance and memory requirements that beset version
- 1.0.X. With the new back-end, database sizes of up to a
- hundred thousand people no longer present a major
- obstacle.
-
- The default extension for GRAMPS' BSDDB database files
- is grdb. The new format is open and fully documented in the
- developer's API reference distributed with the source code
- of GRAMPS.
-
-
- Preferred format
-
- The preferred and default format for &app; is the
- new BSDDB format.
-
-
- A consequence of the new database back-end is that the
- "saving" function is no longer necessary (or even
- possible). Now, once you approve changes, they are
- immediately applied; this means that clicking
- OK in the Person, Family, Source,
- Place, Media object, or Event editor immediately records
- changes to the database.
-
- In previous versions, you could "quit without
- saving." This option no longer exists per se; however,
- in version 2.0.0, you can achieve the same effect if you
- abandon or "cancel" all changes and then
- quit.
-
- Also, it is now possible to undo recent
- actions.
-
-
-
- Other database back-ends
-
-
- Along with the BSDDB backend, we've incorporated
- "in-memory" database handling for the GRAMPS XML
- and GEDCOM formats. This means you can now open files in
- those two formats and work with their data without having to
- first create a new database and import data into it. Since
- this approach requires GRAMPS to hold all the data in
- memory, it is only useful for small databases (depending on
- available memory size).
-
-
- GEDCOM Editing
-
- Please keep in mind that some information in a
- GEDCOM file may be lost during import into GRAMPS. Simply
- opening and viewing the file will not change it. However,
- if any changes were made and they were not abandoned upon
- exit, exiting GRAMPS will save the data, with the possible
- data loss.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Desktop integration
-
-
- We've improved the way GRAMPS integrates with the GNOME
- desktop interface common to many Linux distributions. All file
- formats recognized by GRAMPS are now registered as mime types;
- each has its own icon and has GRAMPS as its default
- handler. Thus, if you double-click on any file having one of
- these formats, GRAMPS will launch and open the file.
-
- We've also added support for GNOME's "recent
- documents" function and have incorporated this function
- within GRAMPS itself.
-
-
-
-
-
- Interface improvements
-
-
- We've made numerous changes in the interface. Most of
- them are subtle and incremental improvements, and all of them
- cannot be listed here. The most notable are:
-
-
-
- Removal of alphabetical tabs.
-
-
- Ability to add/remove/rearrange columns in list views.
-
-
- Removal of the Save function and addition of Undo.
-
-
- Proper window management.
-
-
- Support for Tip of the Day.
-
-
- Person-dependent context menus (right-click) in
- Pedigree View, listing parents, children, spouses, and
- siblings.
-
-
- Addition of an Export wizard.
-
-
- Built-in Find function in list views.
-
-
- Addition of a Date selector dialog.
-
-
- Name editor enhancements: patronymic names and
- non-default grouping.
-
-
- "Recent document" support (both within GRAMPS and
- GNOME-wide)
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Import and Export
-
- We've added import and export filters for the GeneWeb format.
-
-
-
-
- Reports
-
-
-
- We've added a new report: Statistics Chart.
-
-
- We've changed the overall report framework. All
- reports now remember the options you configure for
- them.
-
-
- It is possible to generate reports from the command
- line, without launching an interactive GRAMPS
- session.
-
-
- The report API is much simpler now, making it easy to
- write custom reports.
-
-
- A single code instance may be used for a standalone
- report, a book item, and a command-line report.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Internationalization
-
- The approach for entering and displaying dates has
- been completely reworked. The new framework allows for a
- deeper localization of displayed dates than was ever
- possible using the translatable strings.
- The internationalization of names has also been
- improved. Names can be grouped under a non-default
- string. Patronymic names are supported, and it is easy to
- program new ways to display names in the manner customary to
- a given culture or language.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Typographical conventions
-
-
- In this book, some words are marked with special typography:
-
-
-
-
- Applications
-
-
-
-
- Commands you type at the command line
-
-
-
-
- Filenames
-
-
-
-
- Replaceable text
-
-
-
-
- Labels for buttons and other
- portions of the graphical interface
-
-
-
-
- Menu selections look like this:
-
- Menu
- Submenu
- Menu Item
-
-
-
-
-
- Buttons you can click
-
-
-
-
- Anything you type in
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The manual also provides assorted bits of additional information in
- tips and notes, as follows.
-
-
- Tip
-
- Tips and bits of extra information will look like
- this.
-
-
-
-
- Note
-
- Notes will look like this.
-
-
-
-
-
- Finally, there are warnings, notifying you where you should be careful:
-
-
- Example Warning
-
- This is what a warning looks like. If there's a chance
- you'll run into trouble, you will be warned beforehand.
-
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/gramps2/help/C/usage.xml b/gramps2/help/C/usage.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index 5ead8b983..000000000
--- a/gramps2/help/C/usage.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5674 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
- Usage
-
-
- Now we turn to a detailed exploration of the day-to-day use of
- GRAMPS. First, we should point out that GRAMPS often offers more
- than one way to do the same task. We'll try to point out some of
- these alternatives where appropriate.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Starting a New Database
-
-
- To start a new database, choose
- FileNew
- . You will then be asked to give the new database a name.
-
-
-
-
- &app; databases
-
-
- &app; stores your data in a Berkeley database, sometimes
- known as BSDDB. These files have ".grdb" as
- their default extension. The extension is automatically
- added to your filename.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Opening a Database
-
-
- To open a database, either choose
- File
- Open or click the
- Open button on the Toolbar. The
- Open database dialog will appear and you'll
- see a list of files. If you don't see the file you're looking
- for, make sure the All files filter is selected. (This dialog
- has a "filetype" filter, meaning it may only be
- showing files that have a certain extension.)
-
-
-
- To open a recently accessed database, choose
- FileOpen Recent
- and select the filename from the list.
-
-
-
- If you do not have "write permissions" for the
- selected database, it will be opened in a Read Only mode. In
- this mode, the data may be viewed, but no changes will be made
- to the database. To indicate this mode, the title of the main
- window will be appended with (Read Only)
- text.
-
-
-
- GRAMPS allows you to open certain databases that have not been
- saved in GRAMPS' own file format. These include XML and GEDCOM
- databases. But you should be aware that if the XML or GEDCOM
- database is relatively large, you may encounter some performance
- problems. These can be avoided by creating a new GRAMPS database
- and importing your XML/GEDCOM data into it.
-
-
-
-
- Opening XML and GEDCOM databases
-
-
- XML and GEDCOM databases require all data to be held in
- memory. GRAMPS' native grdb format does not. Thus, a database
- with a grdb format can access data quicker and more efficiently.
-
-
-
-
-
- GEDCOM Editing
-
-
- Please keep in mind that some information in a GEDCOM file may
- be lost during import into &app;. Simply opening and viewing
- the file will not change it. However, if any changes were
- made and they were not abandoned upon exit, exiting &app; will
- save the data, with possible data loss.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Saving Changes to Your Database
-
-
- GRAMPS saves your changes as soon as you apply them. This means,
- for example, that any time you click OK
- when using GRAMPS, your changes are immediately recorded and
- saved. There is no separate "save" command (although
- there is a "save as" command that we'll discuss later.)
-
-
-
- You can undo changes you've made by selecting
- Edit
- Undo. If you select this
- command repeatedly, your most recent changes will be undone one at
- a time.
-
-
-
- If you want to return your database to the way it was when you
- opened it, select
- FileAbandon changes
- and quit. (This is just like quitting
- without saving in other programs.)
-
-
-
- If you would like to save your database under a different name,
- you can do so by choosing File
- Save as... and specifying
- the name (and, optionally, the format) of your new database. Note
- that "Save as" will allow you to continue editing the
- newly saved database. If this is not what you want to do, you may
- wish to use the "Export" command instead.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Importing Data
-
-
- Importing allows you to bring data from other genealogy programs
- into a &app; database. Currently, &app; can import data from the
- following formats:
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Another &app; database (having the "grdb" file
- extension),
-
-
-
- GEDCOM
-
-
- &app; XML
-
-
- &app; package
-
-
- GeneWeb
-
-
-
-
- Importing vs. opening
-
- Please recognize that importing a database is different from
- opening a database. When you import, you are actually bringing
- data from one database into a GRAMPS database. When you open a
- file, you are editing your original file.
-
-
-
-
-
- To import data, select File
- Import. The Import
- database dialog will open, asking you to specify the
- file you wish to import.
-
-
-
-
- Data loss with some formats
-
- It is important to note that the importing process is not
- perfect for GEDCOM and GeneWeb databases. There is a chance
- that some of the data in these databases will not be imported
- into &app;.
-
-
-
-
- The &app; database (grdb), &app; XML, and &app; package are all
- native &app; formats. There is no risk of information loss
- when import or exporting to these formats.
-
-
-
-
- &app; database (grdb)
-
-
- The native &app; database format is a specific form of
- Berkeley database (BSDDB) with a special structure of data
- tables. This format is binary and
- architecture-dependent. It is very quick and efficient,
- but not generally portable across computers with
- different binary architecture (e.g. i386 vs alpha).
-
-
-
-
-
- &app; XML
-
-
- The &app; XML file was the default format for
- older versions of &app;. Unlike the grdb
- format, it is architecture independent and
- human-readable. The database may also have references to
- non-local (external) media objects, therefore it is not
- guaranteed to be completely portable. The &app; XML
- database is created by saving (
-
- File
- Save As...
-
- ) or exporting (
-
- File
- Export...
-
- ) data in that format
-
-
-
-
- &app; package
-
-
- The &app; package is a compressed archive containing the &app;
- XML file and all media objects (images, sound files,
- etc.) to which the database refers. Because it contains all
- the media objects, this format is completely portable.
- The &app; package is created by exporting (
-
- File
- Export...
-
- ) data in that format.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- If you import information from another GRAMPS database or GRAMPS
- XML database, you will see the progress of the operation in the
- progress bar of GRAMPS' main window.
-
-
-
- If you import a GEDCOM database, you will see the import dialog
- shown in . The information in
- the dialog is updated as the import progresses.
-
-
-
-
-
- GEDCOM Import
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows GEDCOM Import Window.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- If a media file is not found during import, you'll be prompted
- to take one of the actions indicated in .
-
-
-
-
-
- Missing Media dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Missing Media dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- If you don't have the missing file and have no possibility of
- replacing it, click the Remove Object
- button. This will remove the object that corresponds to the
- missing file as well as all the references in the database to
- that object.
-
-
-
-
- If you're not sure where the missing file is, but think you
- still have it or may be able to find it, click the
- Keep Reference button. If and when you
- find the file, you can simply copy it into your database
- directory and have access to it through &app;.
-
-
-
-
- If you can supply the missing file during the import
- operation, click the Select File
- button. This will copy the file you select in place of the
- missing file. No references will be altered in the database.
-
-
-
-
- To automatically use the selection made in this dialog for
- all missing media files, check the Use this
- selection for all missing media files box. This
- will remember your choice and use it for all media files
- missing during this import, so that no further dialogs will
- be presented. Use this option if you anticipate many missing
- files and want to deal with all of them in the same manner.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Exporting Data
-
-
- Exporting allows you to share any portion of your &app; database
- with other researchers as well as to enable you to transfer your
- data to another computer. Currently, &app; can export data to
- the following formats: &app; database (grdb), &app; XML, GEDCOM,
- &app; package, Web Family Tree, and GeneWeb.
-
-
-
-
- Export is saving a copy
-
- When you export, you are saving a copy of the currently opened
- database. Exporting creates another file with a copy of your
- data. Note that the database that remains opened in your GRAMPS
- window is NOT the file saved by your export. Additional editing
- of the currently opened database will not alter the copy
- produced by the export.
-
-
-
-
- To export data, choose File
- Export. This will
- bring up the Export assistant. Its pages
- will guide you through the format selection (see ), file selection, and format
- specific export options (see ). After a final confirmation
- page, the export will be performed according to the choices you
- have made. At any time, you can click the
- Back and revise any selection, and then
- go forward to redo the export.
-
-
-
-
-
- Export assistant: format selection
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows format selection page of an Export assistant
-
-
-
-
-
- Exporting into the GEDCOM format
-
-
- &app; allows you to export a database into the common GEDCOM
- format. It provides options that allow you to fine tune your
- export (see ).
-
-
-
-
- Encoding
-
-
- Since different languages use different characters, it is
- important to tell a GEDCOM file what character set is used.
- The two formats traditionally accepted are ASCII and ANSEL.
- Since all ASCII characters are valid ANSEL characters,
- GRAMPS does not provide an option for ASCII.
-
-
- Because ANSEL is not commonly used, some genealogy programs
- will accept ANSI (more commonly know as ISO-8859-1) and
- Unicode character sets. Only select ANSI or Unicode if you
- know any program that attempts to read the GEDCOM file will
- understand these character sets.
-
-
-
-
- Filter
-
-
- The filter allows you to export a limited amount of data,
- based on the criteria you select.
-
-
-
-
-
- Target
-
-
- While GEDCOM is a standard, not every program implements
- it in the same way. This can lead to data loss. &app; can
- reduce the data loss in some cases. You can tell &app;
- what program is the target, and &app; will customize the
- exported file for that program. If your program is not
- listed, choose the "GEDCOM 5.5 Standard".
-
-
-
-
-
- Copyright
-
-
- Allows you to select a statement to describe your Copyright
- claim.
-
-
-
-
-
- No not include records marked private
-
-
- Check this box to prevent private records from being
- included in the exported file.
-
-
-
-
-
- Restrict data on living people
-
-
- Check this box to limit the information exported for living
- people. This means that all information concerning their
- birth, death, addresses, significant events, etc., will be
- omitted in the exported GEDCOM file. If you choose this
- option, you will be given additional options to limit
- further the data on living people. For example, you can
- choose to substitute the word "Living" for the
- first name; you can exclude notes; and you can exclude
- sources for living people.
-
-
- Sometimes, it is not always obvious from the data if someone
- is actually alive. &app; uses an advanced algorithm to try
- to determine if a person could still be alive. Remember,
- &app; is making its best guess, and it may not always be
- able to guess correctly all the time. Please double check
- your data.
-
-
-
-
-
- Reference images from path
-
-
- Check this box to tell GRAMPS to use the specific path for
- your images when writing image references in GEDCOM.
-
-
- This option allows specify where your image files are
- located. This is useful when you are transfering your GEDCOM
- file from one computer to another. It tells the program
- that is importing the data where your images are.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Export assistant: GEDCOM options
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows GEDCOM options page of an Export druid
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Export into &app; formats
-
-
- &app; database (grdb) export
-
-
- Exporting to the &app; native format will simply make a
- copy of your data under another name. Exporting to this
- format can also be useful if you have directly opened
- an XML or GEDCOM file and would like to save it as the
- grdb file.
-
-
-
-
- &app; XML database export
-
-
- Exporting into &app; XML format will produce a database
- compatible with the previous versions of &app;. As XML
- is a text-based human-readable format, you may also use
- it to take a look at your data.
-
-
-
-
- &app; package export
-
-
- Exporting to the &app; package format will create a
- compressed file that contains the database and copies of
- all associated media files. This is useful if you want to
- move your database to another computer or to share it with
- someone.
-
-
-
-
- Export to CD
-
-
- Exporting to CD will prepare your database and copies of
- all media object files for recording onto a CD. To
- actually burn the CD, you will need to go to the GNOME
- burn:/// location, which can be
- accessed by navigating through Nautilus: After exporting
- to CD, select Go
- CD Creator in the
- Nautilus menu. Your database directory will show up. To
- burn it to the CD, click the CD icon on the Nautilus
- toolbar, or select
- FileWrite to
- CD in the Nautilus menu.
-
-
-
-
-
- If a media file is not found during export, you will see the
- same Missing Media dialog you encounter
- with GEDCOM export.
-
-
-
-
-
- Export into other formats
-
-
- Web Family Tree
-
-
- Exporting to Web Family Tree will create a text file
- that can be used by the Web Family Tree program.
- Export options include filter selection and the ability
- to limit data on living people to that of their family
- ties.
-
-
-
-
- GeneWeb
-
-
- Exporting to GeneWeb will save a copy of your data into
- a popular web genealogy format. To find out more about
- GeneWeb and its format, visit
- http://cristal.inria.fr/~ddr/GeneWeb/en/.
-
-
-
-
- vCalendar and vCard
-
-
- Exporting to vCalendar or vCard will save information in
- a format used in many calendaring and addressbook
- applications, sometimes called PIM for Personal
- Information Manager.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Entering and Editing Data: Quick Start Overview
-
-
- This section is designed to give you the basic knowledge necessary
- to start putting your genealogical information into &app;. It
- will explain how to enter people into the database and how to
- specify their family relationships. (A more detailed explanation
- will follow in the section entitled .)
-
-
-
- First, let's identify the types of information you can enter into
- your GRAMPS database. These include:
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Personal information about an individual (names, addresses,
- birth and death dates, etc.)
-
-
-
-
- Information about an individual's relationships (marriages,
- divorces, civil unions, etc.)
-
-
-
-
- Information about an individual's parents and children
-
-
-
-
- Sources that document your research
-
-
-
-
-
- Keybindings
-
- In addition to interacting with GRAMPS through menu items and
- buttons, you can use its extensive set of
- "keybindings." For more information, see .
-
-
-
-
- Now let's take a quick look at how you can enter and edit these
- various types of information.
-
-
-
-
- To Add or Edit a Person
-
- To add a person to the database, switch to the People View
- () and then click the
- Add on the toolbar. Enter any data you
- know about this person into the Edit
- Person dialog (see
- for details).
-
- To edit information about a person already
- present in the database, select the person from the People View
- and click the Edit
- button on the toolbar.
-
-
-
- Alternate ways of adding or editing a person
-
- You can also use Add... and
- Edit... menu items available under
- Edit. Or you can right-click on the
- person and select Add... or
- Edit... from the context menu that pops
- up.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To Specify a Relationship
-
-
- To specify a relationship, select the person for whom the
- relationship applies. Switch to the Family View
- () and you'll see this individual
- indicated as the "Active person".
-
-
-
- Now a question: Does the person who will form the relationship
- with the Active person already exist in the database? If yes,
- click the middle button to the right of the Spouse box. You'll
- then be able to browse through the list of people in the
- database to select the one you want. If not, click the topmost
- button to the right of the Spouse box. This will allow you to
- add a new person to the database and to specify the
- relationship this person has to the Active person.
-
-
-
-
- Filtering
-
- By default, GRAMPS filters the displayed list to show only
- those people who could theoretically have a relationship with
- the Active Person. That is, GRAMPS only shows those people
- whose birth dates and death dates fit within the lifetime of
- the Active Person. If you wish, you can add a person to the
- list by clicking the + button. To
- completely override the filter and display all people from the
- database, check the Show all box.
-
-
-
-
- To edit an existing relationship, double-click in the Spouse
- box. If there is more than one relationship in the list, you can
- select the spouse or partner you want from the list before
- double-clicking.
-
-
-
- Alternate ways of editing relationships.
-
- Most of the functions described above are also available in
- the context menu that pops up when you right-click.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To Specify Parents
-
-
- To specify the parents for a person, highlight that individual
- in the People View and then switch to the Family View (). Your selected person will be
- indicated as the Active person. Click the
- + button to the right of the
- Active person's parents list box. This
- will bring up the Choose Parents
- dialog. You will see three sections, one for father, one for
- mother, and one for specifying the relationships between
- everyone.
-
-
-
- If the father and mother of the Active person are already stored
- in your database, you can scroll through the lists and make your
- selections. If they are not in the database, you can click
- + to add them.
-
-
-
- Filtering
-
- By default, GRAMPS will limit both lists to people who could
- possibly be the parents (judged by the date of birth) of the
- Active person. To override this, check the Show all box for
- each list.
-
-
-
-
- To specify parents of the Active person's spouse, switch to
- Family View and then click the + button
- to the right of the Spouse's parents list box.
-
-
-
- To edit information about parents who are already present in the
- database, move the mouse over the corresponding parents' box and
- double-click.
-
-
-
- Alternate ways of specifying parents
-
- These functions can also be performed by right-clicking on the
- parents' box and using the context menu that pops up.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To Specify Children
-
- To specify children of an Active person, switch to the Family
- View () and then click either the
- second or the third button from the top right of the
- children list box. The second button adds a child to the
- database and to the family, while the third button adds a
- child to the family who is already present in the database.
-
-
- If using the third button, select a child from the list and
- specify the child's relationship with father and mother using
- menus at the bottom. If you want, you can add a person to the
- list by clicking the Add... button. By
- default, &app; will limit the lists to people who could
- possibly be the child (judged by the date of birth) of the
- active person. To override this, check the Show
- all box.
-
-
- The relationship of the child to the parents can be modified by
- right-clicking in the children's box and using the context menu
- that pops up. Again, most of the above functions are available
- through this context menu.
-
-
-
-
-
- Adding Photos and Other Media Objects
-
- You can add photos and other media objects to individual people,
- events, sources, and places. You can also add images that might
- not be limited to a single person or event (for example, group
- family photos).
-
- If you want to add an image to a single person, switch to the
- People View (), select a
- person, and then click the Edit icon on
- the toolbar. This will bring up the Edit
- Person dialog (). Next, select the
- Gallery tab, and click the
- + button to call up the Select
- a media object dialog. Type a filename or browse to
- find the image file you want and then provide a title for that
- image. Keep adding images until you are done.
-
- To add images related to a relationship (for example, a
- marriage), switch to the Family View () and double-click on the Spouse box. This
- calls up the Marriage/Relationship editor
- dialog. Select the Gallery tab and click
- the + button to add an image.
-
- To add images related to a source or a place, first switch to
- the Source View () or Place View
- (). Select the source or place you
- want and then either double-click on it or click the
- Edit icon on the toolbar. Select the
- Gallery tab and click the
- + button to add an image.
-
-
-
- Finally, to add images that you want to include in the database,
- but hare are not limited to any particular person, relationship,
- source or place, switch to the Media View (). Then click the
- Add icon on the toolbar to add an
- image. If you have already added any images to any individual
- galleries, you will also find them listed in the Media View.
-
-
-
- Alternate way of adding images to galleries
-
- An image can always be added to any gallery by using
- drag-and-drop. Items can be dragged from the Media View, any
- gallery, the desktop, the file manager or a web browser and
- dropped on the target gallery, adding the image to the
- gallery.
-
-
-
-
- In any gallery, you can also use the
- Edit to edit image information and the
- - button and to remove the image
- reference from that gallery.
-
-
-
- Removing an image from a gallery
-
- Removing a media object from a gallery does not remove the
- image from the database. To completely remove the image from
- the database, delete it from Media View by first selecting it
- and then clicking the Remove icon on
- the toolbar.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To Edit Sources and Places
-
- To add a source or a place to the database, switch to the
- appropriate Source View () or
- Place View (). Then click the
- Add icon on the toolbar to add a
- source/place. Enter the information into the Source
- Editor (or Place Editor)
- dialog.
-
-
- To edit information about sources and places already present
- in the database, switch to the appropriate view, select an
- entry you would like to view/modify, and then click the
- Edit icon on the
- toolbar. Alternatively, you may double-click on the entry to
- edit it.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Enterng and Editing Data: Complete Description
-
- The previous section offered you a quick overview of how to enter
- and edit data in GRAMPS. This section continues that discussion in
- much greater detail.
-
- As we have seen above, GRAMPS offers you a series of Views. Each
- of these Views gives you opportunities to enter and edit
- information. In fact, you can often get to the same information
- from different Views.
-
- In GRAMPS, information is entered and edited through what we call
- dialogs. Since we use that term frequently, we should define what
- we mean by it:
-
- A dialog is a pop-up window that provides one or more forms for
- entering and editing data that fits a certain category. Examples
- in GRAMPS include the Edit Person dialog and the
- Marriage/Relationship dialog, among many others.
-
- A dialog often includes a series of "notebook tabs" that
- group the information into subcategories. For example, the Edit
- Person dialog has notebook tabs for subcategories such as Events,
- Attributes, Addresses, and Notes, among others.
-
-
-
- Add, Remove, and Edit buttons
-
- In most cases, GRAMPS uses a + to
- correspond to Add, a
- - correspond to
- Remove, and an icon of a pen on a sheet
- of paper to denote Edit. We will continue
- referring to the latter as the Edit
- button, while using + and
- - to denote the two former buttons.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Editing Information About People
-
-
- Information about people is entered and edited through the
- Edit Person dialog. This dialog can be
- invoked from different Views in the following ways:
-
-
-
-
- From the People View:
-
-
-
-
- Double-click the name of the person whose data you would
- like to edit
-
-
-
-
- Select the name by single click and
- then click the Edit button on the
- toolbar.
-
-
-
-
- Select the name and then press Enter.
-
-
-
-
- Select Edit... from the
- Edit menu of &app;
-
-
-
-
- Select Edit from the context menu
- that appears upon right-click on the name.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- From the Family View:
-
-
- To edit active person's data, move the mouse into the
- Active person box.
-
- To edit Spouse's data, shift-click the
- Spouse entry.
-
- From the Spouse and
- Children boxes you can select the
- desired person, right-click, and use the context menu
- that pops up.
-
-
-
-
- From the Pedigree View:
-
-
- Double-click in the box having the name of the person
- whose data you want to edit.
-
-
-
-
-
- In each of the above cases, the Edit Person
- dialog will appear:
-
-
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The top of the window shows the name of the person whose data is
- being edited. Below this name are ten "notebook tabs"
- containing different categories of available information. Click
- any tab to view and edit its contents. Clicking the
- OK button at the bottom will apply all
- the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog
- window. Clicking the Cancel button will
- close the window without applying any changes. If any data in
- any tabs were modified, an alert window will appear, prompting
- you to choose from the following options: close the dialog
- without saving changes, cancel the initial cancel request, or
- save the changes.
-
-
-
-
-
- Clicking OK will immediately save
- changes to the database. There is no need for a Save
- operation, since all changes are immediate.
-
-
-
-
- If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
- data. If not, it has no data.
-
-
-
- The tabs reflect the following categories of personal data:
-
-
-
- General
-
-
- The General tab contains general
- information about the person. This includes
- Given name, Family
- name, Family prefix (such
- as "de" or "van"),
- Suffix (e.g. Jr. or III),
- Title (e.g. Dr. or Rev.),
- Nickname (Bob for Robert),
- Type of the name (birth name, married
- name, etc.) and Date and
- Place of birth and death. Some of
- these (Family name,
- Type, and both
- Place fields), also provide
- "autocompletion" feature: as you type in these
- fields, a menu appears below the field containing database
- entries that match your
- partial input. This gives you a shortcut by letting you
- select an entry that already exists in the database rather
- than having to type it all out. You can select the entry
- using your mouse or using your arrow and
- Enter keys.
-
-
- The Edit (that is, the "pen and
- paper" icon) next to the Family
- name entry field invokes the Name
- Editor dialog. This dialog allows editing the
- preferred name in full detail (see ).
-
- The Gender radio buttons offer the
- choice of person's gender : male,
- female, and
- unknown.
-
-
- Clicking the colored "LED" buttons located next
- to the birth and death Date fields will bring up the
- Date Selection dialog allowing
- detailed modification of the date, see . Clicking either the
- Edit button located next to the
- birth and death LED buttons will bring up a dialog
- allowing you to edit the birth or death details (see ).
-
-
-
- The field ID displays the &app; ID
- number which identifies the user in the database. This value
- helps you distiguish between people who have the same name.
- You may enter any unique value you want. If you do not provide
- a value, &app; will automatically select a value for you.
-
-
-
- The Image area shows the first image
- available in the Gallery of this
- person (if any exist).
-
-
-
- Finally, the Information is complete
- and Information is private check
- buttons let you mark whether or not the person's record is
- complete and whether or not the record is private.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Names
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The Names tab lets you view and edit
- any alternate names the person may have. The bottom part
- of the window lists all alternate names for the person
- stored in the database. The top part shows the details of
- the currently selected name in the list (if any). The
- buttons +,
- Edit, and -
- allow the addition, modification, and removal of an
- alternate name from the database. Note that the Edit and -
- buttons become available only when an alternate name is
- selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - Names
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Names Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- When you add a new name or edit an existing name, the Name
- Editor dialog is invoked. This dialog is described in the
- section below (see ).
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Events
-
-
-
- The Events tab lets you view and edit
- any events relevant to the person. The bottom part of the
- window lists all such events stored in the database. The
- top part shows the details of the currently selected event
- in the list (if any). The buttons
- +, Edit, and
- - allow you to add, modify, and
- remove an event record from the database. Note that the
- Edit and -
- buttons become available only when an event is selected
- from the list.
-
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - Events
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Events Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
- The Attributes tab lets you view and
- assign attributes to the person. You have complete freedom
- to define and use attributes. For example, attributes
- might be assigned to describe the person's physical
- characteristics or personality traits.
-
- Note that each attribute listed in the
- Attribute dialog consists of two
- parts: the Attribute itself and a Value associated with
- that Attribute. This so-called "Parameter-Value" pairing
- can help you organize and systematize your research. For
- example, if you define "Hair color" as an
- Attribute for a person, "Hair Color" will become
- a selectable Attribute for all other people. The Value of
- Hair Color for person A might be red, and brown for person
- B. In similar fashion, you might define an Attribute like
- "Generosity" and use the Value of
- "Enormous" to describe a particularly generous
- person.
-
- The bottom part of the dialog window displays the list of
- all Attributes stored in the database. The top part shows
- the details of the currently selected attribute in the
- list (if any). The buttons +,
- Edit, and -
- let you add, modify, and remove an attribute record from
- the database. Note that the Edit
- and - buttons become available only
- when an attribute is selected from the list.
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - Attributes
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Attributes Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Addresses
-
-
- The Addresses tab lets you view and
- record the various addresses of the person. The bottom
- part of the window lists all addresses stored in the
- database. The top part shows the details of the currently
- selected address in the list (if any). The buttons
- +, Edit, and
- - allow you to correspondingly add,
- modify, and remove an address record from the
- database. Note that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when an address is selected from the list.
-
- Some reports allow you to restrict data on living
- people. In particular, that option will omit their
- addresses.
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - Addresses
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Addresses Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Notes
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - Notes
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Notes Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The Notes tab provides a place to
- record various items about the person that do not fit
- neatly into other categories. To add a note or modify
- existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
- field.
-
- The Format option lets you set the
- way the note will appear in reports and web pages. If you
- select "Flowed," the text generated will have single
- spaces put in place of all multiple spaces, tabs, and
- single end-of-line characters. A blank line inserted
- between two blocks of text will signal a new paragraph;
- additional inserted lines will be ignored.
-
- If you select the Preformatted option, the text in reports
- and web pages will appear exactly as you enter it in the
- Notes dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources
-
-
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - Sources
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Sources Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The Sources tab allows you to view
- and document the sources for the information you
- collect. These might be general sources that do not
- describe a specific event, but which nevertheless yield
- information about the person. For example, if Aunt
- Martha's memoirs mention her great-grandson Paul, the
- researcher may assume that this Paul actually existed and
- cite Aunt Martha's memoirs as the source that justifies
- this assumption.
-
-
-
-
- Sources which document specific events are best
- recorded as sources of the event (under the
- Events tab) instead of as a source
- of the person. The person's
- Sources tab is best used for
- any sources not specificly connected to any other data.
-
-
-
-
- The central part displays the list of all source
- references stored in the database in relation to the
- person. The buttons +,
- Edit, and
- - allow you to correspondingly
- add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
- person. Note that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when a source reference is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
- Gallery
-
-
-
-
- The Gallery tab lets you view and
- store photos, videos, and other media objects that are
- associated with the person. The central part of the window
- lists all such media objects. Any object in the form of a
- valid image file will result in the display of a thumbnail
- view of the image. For other objects such as audio files,
- movie files, etc., a corresponding file type icon is
- displayed instead.
-
-
-
-
- The first available image in the gallery will be also
- displayed in the Image area in
- the General tab.
-
-
-
-
- The buttons +,
- Select,
- Edit, and -
- let you add a new image to the database, link to an image
- already stored in the database, modify an image, and
- remove a given media object from the person's gallery.
- Note that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when a media object is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - Gallery
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Gallery Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Removing a media object from a person's gallery does
- not remove it from the database. It only removes the
- reference to that object from this person's record.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Internet
-
-
-
-
- The Internet tab displays Internet
- addresses relevant to the person. The bottom part lists all
- such Internet addresses and accompanying descriptions. The
- top part shows the details of the currently selected
- addresses in the list (if any). The buttons
- +, Edit, and
- - let you add, modify, and remove an
- Internet address. The "Go" button (represented by
- an icon having a green arrow and yellow circle) opens your
- web browser and takes you directly to the highlighted
- page. Note that the Edit,
- -, and Go
- buttons become available only when an address is selected
- from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - Internet
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Internet Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LDS
-
-
- The LDS (Latter Days Saints) tab lets
- you view and edit information about LDS ordinances of the
- person. These are LDS Baptism, Endowment, and Sealed to
- Parents ordinances, as labeled inside the tab. Each
- ordinance is described by its date, LDS temple, and Place
- where it happened. An additional pop-up menu,
- "Parents," is available for the Sealed to
- Parents ordinance. Each ordinance can be further described
- through the selections available in the Status pop-up
- menu. It can also be include notes and references to
- sources through the corresponding
- Sources... and
- Note buttons.
-
-
-
-
- Edit Person dialog - LDS
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows LDS Tab of Edit Person dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Editing Dates
-
- This section describes how to enter and modify dates. Since
- dates are so important in genealogical research, GRAMPS takes
- special care to preserve and use any date information available.
-
- Information can be entered into a date field by directly typing
- it or by invoking the Date selection dialog. Both methods will
- be discussed below, but first, we will cover some important
- features of dates as they are used in GRAMPS.
-
-
-
- Date types
-
- Dates in GRAMPS are classified according to the following types:
-
-
-
-
- Regular
-
-
- A "regular" date is one which includes a specific
- day, date, or month. It can be complete (e.g., June 6, 1990)
- or partial (e.g., July 1977).
-
-
-
-
-
- Before
-
-
- A "before" date is one that can only be identified
- as occurring before a certain day, month, or year.
-
-
-
-
-
- After
-
-
- An "after" date is one that occurs after a certain
- day, month, or year.
-
-
-
-
-
- Range
-
-
- A "range" describes a time period during which the
- event occurred. For example, "between January 1932 and
- March 1932."
-
-
-
-
-
- Span
-
-
- A "span" describes a time period during which a
- condition existed. For example, "from May 12, 2000 to
- February 2, 2002."
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Date formats and parsing rules
-
- GRAMPS recognizes dates entered in a variety of formats. The
- default numeric format is that which is conventional for the
- environment is which GRAMPS is operating; that is, DD.MM.YYYY
- for most European countries, MM/DD/YYYY for the U.S., and so
- on.
-
-
-
- Besides exact dates, &app; recognizes many dates that are
- not regular: before, after, about, ranges and spans. It also
- understands the quality: estimated or calculated. Finally,
- it supports partial dates and many alternative calendars.
- Below is the list of date entry rules to allow precise date
- parsing.
-
-
-
- Date parsing rules
-
- The list only applys to the English version of GRAMPS. If
- you are using localized version of &app;, your version may
- or may not provide a localized date parser. At the time
- of this writing, localized parsers exist for French, German,
- Russian, Finnish, Dutch and Spanish languages.
-
-
- If the localized parser is available for your version,
- chances are that other rules are in effect. If there is no
- manual in your language yet, you may try following your
- instinct and go with the common ways of denoting dates in
- your language. If all else fails, use the Date
- selection dialog described below.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Regular single dates can be entered just as you would
- write them. Examples: May 24, 1961 or January 1,
- 2004.
-
-
-
-
- Dates that are not regular should start with the
- quality: estimated or
- calculated, if applicable.
- Example: est. 1961, or calc 2005. (Note that a quality
- does not need to be specified for regular dates.)
-
-
-
-
- After the quality should appear the type. If the type is
- before, after,
- or about, you scan specify the type by
- writing "before", "after" or
- "about". If the type is a range, write
- "between DATE and DATE", and if the type is a
- span, write "from DATE to DATE". patterns, where
- DATE is a single date.
-
-
- Examples: est from 2001 to 2003, before June 1975, est
- about 2000, calc between May 1900 and January 1, 1990.
-
-
-
-
- Partial dates are entered simply by omitting unknown
- information. Examples: May 1961 and 2004.
-
-
-
-
- Alternate calendars are calendars other than the Gregorian
- calendar. Currently, &app; supports Hebrew, French
- Republican, Julian, Islamic, and Persian alternate
- calendars. To specify the calendar other than the
- default Gregorian, append the name of the calendar to
- the date string, e.g. "January 9, 1905 (julian)".
-
-
-
-
-
- Date Validity Indicators
-
- &app; uses color circles to indicate the validity of the
- entered date.
-
-
- Date LED buttons
-
- The color circles are also referred to as the LED buttons.
- Clicking on an LED button will invoke the Date
- selection dialog described in detail below, see
-
-
-
-
-
-
- A green circle means that the date is valid and complete
- regular date (e.g. May 24, 1961). In simple terms, green
- means that the date corresponds to a unique date.
-
-
-
-
- Yellow circle means that the date is valid but is not a
- regular date. This could be the date of a different
- type: a before date (before May 25, 1962), an after date
- (after May, 1960), an about date (about May 23, 1961), a
- range (between May 1, 1961 and May 31, 1961), or a span
- (from May 1, 1961 to May 31, 1961). It can also be a
- complete single date, but with quality of Estimated or
- Calculated. Finally, it could be a partial date, i.e. a
- regular quality single date missing some portion,
- e.g. May 1961 or 1961.
-
-
- While partial dates do not uniquely define the day, they
- allow at least for some type of comparisons between the
- dates.
-
-
-
-
- Red circle means that the date is not recognized as a
- valid date (e.g. "Christmas week of 61", or
- "the summer when I had surgery"). In such a
- case the date will be stored as a text string and
- therefore cannot be compared other dates. As you can
- see, it is best to avoid such date entries. It would be
- better, for example, to enter a date of "December
- 1961" and then to add the note "Christmas week
- of '61."
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Graphical User Interface for Entering Dates
-
- While the above parsing rules provide a guide for you to type
- in most common dates, you can also use Date
- selection dialog. The dialog is particularly useful
- for building a complex date or for simply insuring that your
- information is entered in a way GRAMPS will understand. The
- Date selection dialog can be invoked by
- clicking the colored circle button next to the date entry
- field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Date selection dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Date selection dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The Calendar menu lets you choose a
- calendar other than the default Gregorian. The
- Quality menu gives you the choices of
- Regular, Estimated, or Calculated. The
- Type menu allows you establish the exact
- date type: Regular, Before, After, About, Range, Span, and
- Text only. You can set the Date by
- setting the day, the month, and the year. In the event that
- your date type is Range or Span, the Second
- date will be activated. Finally, the Text
- comment text entry field allows storing an
- arbitrary text string along with the date.
-
-
-
-
-
- If you have an important comment to make about a date, you
- are better off doing so in a Note that corresponds to the
- event than in the Text comment field of the Date selection
- dialog. We recommend this for the following reason: If you
- enter a date by typing it directly into the date field (that
- is, not via the Date selector dialog), your entry will be
- copied and stored as the text comment string when GRAMPS
- parses the entered text. Thus, any comment that may have
- been there prior to the parsing will be overwritten.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Editing Information About Relationships
-
-
- Information about relationships is entered and edited through
- the Marriage/Relationship Editor
- dialog. This dialog is invoked from Family View by
- double-clicking the Spouse box
-
-
-
-
- You can also invoke this dialog by right-clicking inside the
- Spouse box and selecting "Edit relationship" item
- from the context menu that pops up.
-
-
-
-
-
- Marriage/Relationship Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Marriage/Relationship Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The top of the window shows the names of the people whose
- relationship is being edited. The main part of the window
- displays seven notebook tabs representing different categories
- of information about the relationship. Click any tab to view or
- edit the information it contains. The bottom part has
- OK and Cancel
- buttons. Clicking the OK button at any
- time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
- dialog window. Clicking the Cancel button
- at any time will close the window without applying any
- changes. If any of the data in any tab is modified, an alert
- window will appear that will prompt you choose between closing
- the dialog without saving changes, canceling the initial cancel
- request, or saving the changes.
-
-
-
-
- Clicking OK will immediately save
- changes to the database. This version of &app; does not have
- a separate saving function, all changes are immediate.
-
-
-
-
- If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
- data. If not, it has no data.
-
-
-
- The tabs provide the following information categories of
- relationship data:
-
-
-
-
- General
-
-
- The General tab lets you edit the
- Relationship type. The available types (such as Married,
- Unmarried, etc.) can be chosen from the drop-down
- Relationship type menu. The
- GRAMPS ID field displays the ID
- number which labels this relationship in the database. The
- Last changed label shows the last
- time the relationship was modified. Finally, the
- Information is complete check button indicates whether the
- record of this relationship is complete or not.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Events
-
-
- The Events tab lets you view and edit
- events relevant to the relationship. The bottom part
- displays the list of all such events stored in the
- database. The top part shows the details of the currently
- selected event in the list (if any). The buttons
- +, Edit, and
- - let you add, modify, or remove an
- event record from the database. Note that the
- Edit and -
- buttons become available only when an event is selected
- from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
- The Attributes tab lets you view and
- edit particular information about the relationship that
- can be expressed as attributes. The bottom part displays
- the list of all such attributes stored in the
- database. The top part shows the details of the currently
- selected attribute in the list (if any). The buttons
- +, Edit, and
- - let you add, modify, or remove an
- attribute. Note that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when an attribute is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Notes
-
-
-
- The Notes tab lets you view and edit
- notes associated with the relationship. These could be any
- comments which do not naturally fit into the
- "Parameter-Value" pairs available to
- Attributes. To add a note or modify existing notes simply
- edit the text in the text entry field.
-
-
-
- The Format option lets you set the
- way the note will appear in reports and web pages. If you
- select Flowed, the text generated will have single spaces
- put in place of all multiple spaces, tabs, and single
- end-of-line characters. A blank line inserted between two
- blocks of text will signal a new paragraph; additional
- inserted lines will be ignored.
-
-
- If you select the Preformatted option, the text in reports
- and web pages will appear exactly as you enter it in the
- Notes dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources
-
-
-
- The Sources tab lets you view and
- edit the sources which provide evidence for the
- relationship. These might be documents that refer to the
- relationship, but which do not necessarily document it
- officially. For example, if Aunt Martha's memoirs mention
- that her great-grandson Paul was married, the researcher
- may take this as evidence of the relationship between Paul
- and his wife existed and cite the memoirs as the source
- for this assumption.
-
-
-
-
- Sources that document specific events such as marriages
- or divorces are better filed in relation to those
- events, under the Events tab.
-
-
-
-
- The central part of the Sources window displays the list
- of all source references associated with the
- relationship. The buttons +,
- Edit, and -
- allow let you add, modify, and remove a source reference
- to this relationship. Note that the
- Edit and -
- buttons become available only when a source reference is
- selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Gallery
-
-
-
- The Gallery tab lets you store and
- display photos and other media objects associated with the
- relationship. The central part of the window lists all
- such objects and gives you a thumbnail preview of image
- files. Other objects such as audio files, movie files,
- etc., are represented by a generic GRAMPS icon. The
- buttons +,
- Select, Edit,
- and - let you add a new image, add a
- reference to an existing image, modify an existing image,
- and remove a media object's link to the relationship. Note
- that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only when
- a media object is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- LDS
-
-
-
- The LDS (Latter Days Saints) tab
- displays information about the LDS Sealed to
- Spouse ordinance. The data can include date,
- LDS temple, and Place. The status of the ordinance can be
- described through the selections available in the
- Status pop-up menu and can also be
- referenced in the corresponding
- Sources... and
- Note buttons.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Editing Information About Sources
-
- To edit source data, switch to the Sources View and select the
- desired entry in the list of sources. Double-click that
- entry or click the Edit icon on the
- toolbar to invoke the following Source
- Editor dialog:
-
-
-
-
-
- Source Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Source Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The main part of the window displays four notebook tabs
- containing different categories of information. Click a tab to
- view or edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
- OK and Cancel
- buttons. Clicking OK will apply all the
- changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking
- the Cancel button will close the window
- without applying any changes.
-
-
-
-
- Clicking OK will immediately save
- changes to the database (write on disk). All changes are
- immediate.
-
-
-
-
- If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
- data. If not, it has no data.
-
-
-
- The tabs provide the following information categories of
- source data:
-
-
-
- General
-
-
- The General tab lets you define basic
- information about the source: its
- Title, Author,
- Abbreviation, and
- Publication information. You can type
- this information directly into the adjacent fields.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Note
-
-
- The Note tab provides a place to
- record various information about the source that does not
- fit neatly into other categories. To add a note or modify
- existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
- field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Data
-
-
-
- The Data tab displays
- "Key/Value" pairs that may be associated with
- the source. These are similar to the
- "Attributes" used for other types of GRAMPS
- records. The difference between these Key/Value pairs and
- Attributes is that Attributes may have source references
- and notes, while Key/Value data may not.
-
-
-
- The central part of the window lists all existing
- Key/Value pairs. The buttons + and
- - let you add and remove pairs. To
- modify the text of Key or Value, first select the desired
- entry. Then click in either the Key or Value cell of that
- entry and type your text. When you are done, click outside
- the cell to exit editing mode.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Gallery
-
-
-
- The Gallery tab lets you store and
- display photos and other media objects associated with a
- given source (for example, a photo of a birth
- certificate). The central part of the window lists all
- such media objects and gives you a thumbnail preview of
- image files. Other objects such as audio files, movie
- files, etc., are represented by a generic GRAMPS icon. The
- buttons +,
- Select,
- Edit, and -
- let you add a new image, add a reference to an existing
- image, modify an existing image, and remove a media
- object's link to the source. Note that the
- Edit and -
- buttons become available only when a media object is
- selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- References
-
-
-
- The References tab lists all the
- database records that refer to this source, if any. The
- list can be ordered by any of its column headings:
- Type, ID, or
- Name. Double-clicking an entry allows
- you to view and edit the record.
-
-
-
-
- Only primary objects can be shown in the
- References tab: Person, Family,
- Event, Place, or Media object. Secondary objects
- such as Names and Attributes can only be accessed
- through the primary objects to which they belong.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Editing Information About Places
-
-
- To edit information about places, switch to the Places View and
- select the desired entry from the list of places. Double-click
- that entry or click the Edit button on
- the toolbar to bring up the following Place
- Editor dialog:
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Place Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Place Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The main part of the window displays seven notebook tabs
- containing different categories of information. Click a tab to
- view or edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
- OK and Cancel
- buttons. Clicking OK will apply all the
- changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking
- the Cancel button will close the window
- without applying any changes.
-
-
-
-
-
- Clicking OK will immediately save
- changes to the database). All changes are immediate.
-
-
-
-
- If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
- data. If not, it has no data.
-
-
-
- The tabs represent following categories of place data:
-
-
-
- General
-
-
- The General tab you view and edit the
- basic information about the place: the
- Title which labels it in the
- database, City, Church
- parish, County,
- State, Country,
- Longitude, and
- Latitude. You can type this
- information directly into the adjacent fields.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Other names
-
-
- The Other names tab lets you view and
- edit other names by which the place might be known. The
- bottom part of the window lists all other names of the
- place stored in the database. The top part of the window
- shows the details of the currently selected name in the
- list (if any). The buttons +,
- Edit, and -
- let you add, modify, and remove a name record. Note that
- the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when a name is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Note
-
-
- The Note tab displays any comments or
- notes concerning the place. To add a note or modify
- existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
- field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources
-
-
-
- The Sources tab lets you view and
- edit sources relevant to a place. The central part of the
- window lists all such source references stored in the
- database. The buttons +,
- Edit, and -
- let you add, modify, and remove a source reference
- associated with a place. Note that the
- Edit and -
- buttons become available only when a source reference is
- selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Gallery
-
-
- The Gallery tab lets you store and
- display photos and other media objects associated with a
- given place. The central part of the window lists all such
- media objects and gives you a thumbnail preview of image
- files. Other objects such as audio files, movie files,
- etc., are represented by a generic GRAMPS icon. The
- buttons +,
- Select,
- Edit, and -
- let you add a new image, add a reference to an existing
- image, modify an existing image, and remove a media
- object's link to the place. Note that the
- Edit and -
- buttons become available only when a media object is
- selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Internet
-
-
- The Internet tab contains Internet
- addresses relevant to the place. The bottom part of the
- window lists all such Internet addresses stored in the
- database. The top part shows the details of the currently
- selected address in the list (if any). The buttons
- +, Edit, and
- - let you add, modify, and remove
- an Internet address. The Go button
- (represented by an icon with a green arrow and yellow
- circle) opens your browser and takes you to the web page
- corresponding to the highlighted Internet address. Note
- that the Edit,
- -, and Go
- buttons become available only when an address is selected
- from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- References
-
-
- The References tab indicates any
- database records (events or LDS ordinances) that refer to
- a place. This information cannot be modified from the
- Place Editor dialog. Instead, the corresponding database
- record (e.g., a birth event) has to be brought up and its
- place reference edited.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Editing Information About Media Objects
-
- To edit media data, switch to the Media View and select the
- desired entry in the list of sources. Double-click on that
- entry or click Edit on the toolbar to
- invoke the following Media Properties
- Editor dialog:
-
-
-
-
-
- Media Properties Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Media Properties Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- A thumbnail preview of the object is presented, along with a
- summary of its properties (ID, path, and object type). The
- central part of the window displays five notebook tabs
- containing different categories of information. Click a tab to
- view or edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
- OK and Cancel
- buttons. Clicking OK will apply all the
- changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking
- the Cancel button will close the window
- without applying any changes.
-
-
-
- Clicking OK will immediately save
- changes to the database (write on disk). All changes are
- immediate.
-
-
-
-
- If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
- data. If not, it has no data.
-
-
-
- The tabs represent the following categories of media data:
-
-
-
- General
-
-
- The General tab lets you view and
- edit the object's Title and Date. You can type this
- information directly into the corresponding fields. For
- the Date, you can also enter information by clicking the
- LED button and invoking the Date
- selection dialog.
-
-
-
- Every media object is referred to by its Path. The user
- is responsible for keeping track of the object
- files. GRAMPS will only reference and display the
- contents, not manage the files themselves.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
-
-
- The Attributes tab lets you view and
- edit particular information about the media object that
- can be expressed as Attributes. The bottom part displays
- the list of all such attributes stored in the
- database. The top part shows the details of the currently
- selected attribute in the list (if any). The buttons
- +, Edit, and
- - let you add, modify, or remove an
- attribute. Note that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when an attribute is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Notes
-
-
- The Note tab provides a place to
- record various information about the source that does not
- fit neatly into other categories. This area is
- particularly useful for recording information that does
- not naturally fit into the "Parameter/Value" pairs
- available to Attributes. To add a note or modify existing
- notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- References
-
-
- The References tab indicates any
- database records that refer to a given media object. The
- list can be ordered according to any of its column
- headings: Type,
- ID, or
- Name. Double-clicking an entry allows
- you to view and edit the corresponding record.
-
-
-
- Only primary objects can be shown in the
- References tab: Person, Family,
- Event, Source, or Place. The secondary objects such as
- Names and Attributes, although able to refer the media
- object, will only show up through their primary objects
- to which they belong.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Editing Information About Events
-
- Events are edited through the Event
- Editor dialog. This dialog can be accessed from
- either the Edit Person dialog or the
- Marriage/Relationship dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
- Event Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Event Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The central part of the window displays five notebook tabs
- containing different categories of information. Click a tab to
- view or edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
- OK and Cancel
- buttons. Clicking OK will apply all the
- changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking
- the Cancel button will close the window
- without applying any changes.
-
-
-
-
- If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
- data. If not, it has no data.
-
-
-
-
- The tabs provide the following information categories of
- the event data:
-
-
-
- General
-
-
- The General tab lets you view and
- edit basic information about the event: its
- Type, Date,
- Place, Cause,
- and Description. You can type this
- information directly into the adjacent fields. The type
- can be selected from available types listed in the Event
- type drop-down menu. The rest of the information can be
- typed in the appropriate text entry fields. Checking the
- Private record box marks the event record as private and
- allows it to be omitted from reports.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources
-
-
- The Sources tab lets you view and
- edit sources relevant to an event. The central part of the
- window lists all such source references stored in the
- database. The buttons +,
- Edit, and -
- let you add, modify, and remove a source reference
- associated with a place. Note that the
- Edit and -
- buttons become available only when a source reference is
- selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Note
-
-
- The Note tab provides a place to
- record notes or comments about the event. To add a note or
- modify existing notes simply edit the text in the text
- entry field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Witnesses
-
-
- The Witnesses tab lets you view and
- edit witnesses to the event. The central part of the
- window lists all such witnesses stored in the
- database. The buttons +,
- Edit, and -
- let you add, modify, and remove a witness reference to
- this event (see ). Note
- that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Editing Source References
-
-
- Source references connect a Source to another object and allow
- you to provide additional information about the source. When
- adding source references to events, places, etc., the following
- dialog appears:
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Source Information dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Source Information dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The dialog includes two main headings, Source
- selection and Source
- details. Source selection
- displays the Title of the Source, its
- Author, and Publication
- information. The Title can be
- selected from the available sources listed in the drop-down
- menu. If the source you are referencing is not already in the
- database, you can enter it by clicking
- New... and filling out the invoked
- Source Editor dialog.
-
- The Source details section indicates the
- details associated with the particular reference to this Source:
- Confidence,
- Volume/Film/Page,
- Date, Text, and
- Comments. You can choose the Confidence
- level from the Confidence drop-down
- menu. The remaining details can be typed in the corresponding
- text entry fields.
-
-
-
-
- Information in this dialog is specific to the particular
- reference. A single source can be referenced many times,
- and all such references will have in common the overall
- source information. This dialog lets you provide
- reference-specific data, such as relevant quotes, comments,
- confidence, page numbers, etc., to further specify and
- document the reference.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Names
-
- Names are edited through the following Name
- Editor dialog:
-
-
-
-
-
- Name Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Name Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The top of the window shows the dialog title including the
- name of the person whose name is being edited. The central
- part of the window displays three notebook tabs containing
- different categories of available information. You can bring
- any tab to the top for viewing or editing by clicking on the
- appropriate tab heading. The bottom part has
- OK and Cancel
- buttons. Clicking the OK button at any
- time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
- dialog window. Clicking the Cancel
- button at any time will close the window without applying any
- changes.
-
-
-
-
-
- The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
- information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
- boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears
- regular (not bold).
-
-
-
-
-
- The tabs provide the following information categories of the
- name data:
-
-
-
-
-
- General
-
-
-
-
- The General tab allows editing of
- general information about the name: given name, family
- name, patronymic (a form of father's name used in some
- languages, e.g. Russian), family prefix, suffix, title,
- and type of the name. The information can be typed in
- the appropriate text entry fields. The family name and
- the type can be also selected from available choices
- listed in the appropriate drop-down menus.
- Options allow you to adjust
- specific grouping, sorting, and displaying properties of
- this name, as well as to provide the date corresponding
- to the name. The Grouping field
- provides an alternative grouping node for a given name,
- overriding the default grouping based on the family
- name. This may be necessary with similar family names
- that need to be grouped together -- for example Russian
- names Ivanov and Ivanova are considered the same, but
- difference in gender is reflected in different
- spelling. To enable typing into this field, check the
- Override check button. The
- Sort as and Display
- as determine the manner in which the name
- appears in the People View and in the reports. The
- Date can provide information on the
- validity of this name -- use spans as necessary. Check
- the Private record box to mark this
- name record as private. This will give you a chance to
- omit this name from being included in reports, if you
- choose so among the report generation options.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources
-
-
-
-
- The Sources tab displays
- information about sources relevant to this name and
- controls allowing its modification. The central part
- displays the list of all such sources' references stored
- in the database. The buttons +,
- Edit, and
- - allow you to correspondingly
- add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
- name. Note that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when a source reference is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Note
-
-
-
-
- The Note tab displays any notes
- concerning the name. To add a note or modify existing
- notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.
-
-
-
-
- The Format option allows you to set
- the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
- reports and web pages). Selecting
- Flowed will replace all multiple
- spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
- single space in the output. The two consecutive new
- lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
- Selecting Preformatted will honor
- all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
- output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
- field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Attributes
- Attributes are edited through the following
- Attribute Editor dialog:
-
-
-
-
- Attribute Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Attribute Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The top of the window shows the dialog title including the
- name of the person whose attribute is being edited. The
- central part of the window displays three notebook tabs
- containing different categories of available information. You
- can bring any tab to the top for viewing or editing by
- clicking on the appropriate tab heading. The bottom part has
- OK and Cancel
- buttons. Clicking the OK button at any
- time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
- dialog window. Clicking the Cancel
- button at any time will close the window without applying any
- changes.
-
-
-
-
-
- The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
- information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
- boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears
- regular (not bold).
-
-
-
- The tabs provide the following information categories of
- the attribute data:
-
-
-
- General
-
-
-
-
- The General tab allows editing of
- the most general information about the attribute: name
- of the attribute and its value. The information can be
- typed in the appropriate text entry fields. The
- attribute name can also be selected from available
- choices (if any) listed in the Attribute
- drop-down menu. Check the Private
- record box to mark this attribute record as
- private. This will give you a chance to omit this
- attribute from being included in the reports, if you
- choose so among the report generation options.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources
-
-
-
-
- The Sources tab displays
- information about sources relevant to this attribute and
- controls allowing its modification. The central part
- displays the list of all such sources references stored
- in the database. The buttons +,
- Edit, and
- - allow you to correspondingly
- add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
- attribute. Note that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when a source reference is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Note
-
-
-
-
- The Note tab displays any notes
- concerning the attribute. To add a note or modify
- existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
- field.
-
-
-
-
- The Format option allows you to set
- the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
- reports and web pages). Selecting
- Flowed will replace all multiple
- spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
- single space in the output. The two consecutive new
- lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
- Selecting Preformatted will honor
- all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
- output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
- field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Addresses
- Addresses are edited through the following
- Address Editor dialog:
-
-
-
-
-
- Address Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Address Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The top of the window shows the dialog title including the
- name of the person whose address is being edited. The central
- part of the window displays three notebook tabs containing
- different categories of available information. You can bring
- any tab to the top for viewing or editing by clicking on the
- appropriate tab heading. The bottom part has
- OK and Cancel
- buttons. Clicking the OK button at any
- time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
- dialog window. Clicking the Cancel
- button at any time will close the window without applying any
- changes.
-
-
-
-
-
- The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
- information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
- boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears
- regular (not bold).
-
-
-
-
-
- The tabs provide the following information categories of the
- address data:
-
-
-
-
-
- General
-
-
-
-
- The General tab allows editing of
- the most general information about the address: date,
- street address, city or county, state or province,
- country, the postal code, and the phone number. The
- information can be typed in the appropriate text entry
- fields. Check the Private record
- box to mark this address record as private. This will
- give you a chance to omit this address from being
- included in reports, if you choose so among the report
- generation options.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Sources
-
-
-
-
- The Sources tab displays
- information about sources relevant to this address and
- controls allowing its modification. The central part
- displays the list of all such sources references stored
- in the database. The buttons +,
- Edit, and
- - allow you to correspondingly
- add, modify, and remove a source reference to this
- address. Note that the Edit and
- - buttons become available only
- when a source reference is selected from the list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Note
-
-
-
-
- The Note tab displays any notes
- concerning the address. To add a note or modify existing
- notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.
-
-
-
-
- The Format option allows you to set
- the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in
- reports and web pages). Selecting
- Flowed will replace all multiple
- spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with
- single space in the output. The two consecutive new
- lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph.
- Selecting Preformatted will honor
- all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the
- output will appear as it is entered into the text entry
- field.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Witnesses
-
- Witnesses are edited through the following Witness
- Editor dialog:
-
-
-
-
-
- Witness Editor dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Witness Editor dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The top of the window shows the dialog title. The central part
- of the window displays information about the witness. The
- bottom part has OK and
- Cancel buttons. Clicking the
- OK button at any time will apply all
- the changes made and close the dialog window. Clicking the
- Cancel button at any time will close
- the window without applying any changes.
-
-
-
-
- The witness name can be entered in two ways, depending upon
- whether the witness is a person already stored in the database
- or not (unrelated person).
-
-
-
-
-
- If the person you would like to add as a witness is in fact
- a member of the database, it is better to use the first
- method below.
-
-
-
-
-
- Person from the database
-
-
-
- If the person's data are stored in a database, check
- Person is in the database box. Then
- click the Select button to invoke
- Select Person dialog. Choose the
- person from that dialog and click the
- OK button. The
- Person text field will display the
- name of the person you selected.
-
-
-
-
-
- Even though the person's name is displayed in the
- Person field, it is not available
- for direct editing.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Unrelated person
-
-
-
- If the person is not in the database, make sure that
- Person is in the database box is
- unchecked. Then enter the name or any description of a
- person into the Person text entry
- field. This information is stored as entered, and this
- is the only place it is stored. In other words, there
- is no reference to that person in the entire database
- except for this witness reference. If the person is in
- fact a member of the database, it is advised to use the
- former method.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The Comment text area allows you to enter
- any comments concerning the witness. To add a comment or to
- modify existing comments simply edit the text in the text
- area.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Merging records
-
-
- Sometime several records in the database turn out to be
- describing the same object: same person, same place, or same
- source. It could happen either when the data is entered twice
- by mistake, or when new information reveals that the two
- entries refer to the same person. It can also happen after
- importing GEDCOM obtained from a relative, whose database
- overlaps with your existing data.
-
-
-
-
- Whenever you detect duplicate records, merging them a useful
- way of correcting the situation.
-
-
-
-
-
- To make a merge, exactly two records have to be selected in
- the appropriate view (People View, Sources View, or Places
- View). This is accomplished by selecting one entry and then
- selecting another person while holding down
- Ctrl key.
-
-
-
-
- Merge People
-
-
- There are two ways of merging personal records:
- Compare and Merge and Fast
- Merge, both available from the
- Edit menu.
-
-
-
-
-
- Merging people does not discard any information with
- either method. The decisions you make during the merge
- only affect which data will become primary and which will
- become secondary for the resulting merged record.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Compare and Merge
-
-
-
-
- When exactly two people are selected, choose
- EditCompare
- and Merge... to invoke
- Compare People dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Compare People dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Compare People dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or
- not the selected records should be merged. If you
- decide that the records should not be merged, despite
- similar names, you may click
- Cancel to close the dialog
- without making any changes. If you decide to proceed
- with merging, select the appropriate
- Select radio button to specify
- the record to be used as the source of primary data,
- then click Merge and close.
-
-
-
-
- The data from the other record will be kept as
- alternate data. Specifically, all names from the other
- record will become alternate names of the merged
- record. Similarly, parents, spouses, and children of
- the other record will become alternate parents,
- spouses, and children of the merged record, and so on.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Fast Merge
-
-
-
-
- When exactly two people are selected, choose
- EditFast
- Merge to invoke
- Merge People dialog.
-
-
-
-
- Merge People dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Merge People dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The dialog allows you to quickly merge two records,
- specifying the record to be used as the source of
- primary data. The data from the other record will be
- kept as alternate data. Specifically, all names from
- the other record will become alternate names of the
- merged record. Similarly, parents, spouses, and
- children of the other record will become alternate
- parents, spouses, and children of the merged record,
- and so on.
-
-
-
-
-
- If you are not certain whether or not you need to
- merge the records, or which record to specify as the
- source of primary data, use Compare and
- Merge method described above..
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Merge Sources
-
-
- When exactly two sources are selected, choose
-
- Edit
- Compare and Merge...
- to invoke Merge
-
- Sources dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Merge Sources dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Merge Sources dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or not
- the selected records should be merged. If you decide that
- the records should not be merged, despite similar titles,
- you may click Cancel to close the
- dialog without making any changes. If you decide to proceed
- with merging, choose the appropriate radio button to specify
- the title, author, abbreviated title, publication
- information, and the ID to be used for the merged record,
- then click OK.
-
-
-
-
- Merge Places
-
-
- When exactly two places are selected, choose
-
- Edit
- Compare and Merge...
-
-
- to invoke Select title dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
- Merge Places dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Select title dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or not
- the selected records should be merged. If you decide that
- the records should not be merged, despite similar titles,
- you may click Cancel to close the
- dialog without making any changes. If you decide to proceed
- with merging, choose the appropriate radio button to specify
- the title of the merged record, or specify
- Other and enter new text, then click
- OK.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Navigation
-
-
- As long as any database is open, &app; is focused on a single
- person usually referred to as an Active person. This allows
- you to view or modify the data concerning this person, his or
- her immediate family, etc. Navigating in the database (i.e.
- moving from person to person) is in fact nothing else but
- changing the Active person. This section describes many
- alternative ways to navigate through the database using both
- the complex and the convenient interfaces &app; provides. All
- these ways eventually accomplish the same thing, but some are
- more convenient than others, depending what you are doing in
- &app; at the moment.
-
-
-
-
-
- Using the People View
-
-
- The most intuitive way to select an active person is to use
- the People View (see ). When in
- the People View, just select the name of the desired person
- from the list by clicking that list entry. The person you have
- selected becomes active. The statusbar updates to reflect the
- change of the active person.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Using the Family View
-
-
- When in the Family View (see ),
- you can easily navigate between the members of the displayed
- family as follows:
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To make the currently selected spouse the active person,
- click the double-arrow button to the right of the active
- person box. Alternatively, right-click into the spouse
- box and select Make the selected spouse an
- active person item from the context menu.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To make the currently selected parents the active family
- (thereby making father the active person and mother the
- selected spouse), click the right-arrow button to the
- right of the active person's parents box. Alternatively,
- right-click into the active person's parents box and
- select Make the selected parents the active
- family item from the context menu.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To make the currently selected spouse's parents the active
- family (thereby making father the active person and mother
- the selected spouse), click the right-arrow button to the
- right of the spouse's parents box. Alternatively,
- right-click into the spouse's parents box and select
- Make the selected parents the active
- family item from the context menu.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To make the currently selected child the active person,
- click the left-arrow button to the right of the children
- box. Alternatively, right-click into the children box and
- select Make the selected child an active
- person item from the context menu.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- In addition to this, &app; provides an extensive set of
- keyboard navigation options. The detailed reference to the key
- bindings is found in the .
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Using the Pedigree View
-
-
- The Pedigree View (see ) also
- allows you to move along the family tree. The benefit of this
- method is that you can see more than one generation of the
- family tree. Also, you can jump directly from a great-grandson
- to a great-grandfather without going through the intermediate
- generations.
-
-
-
-
- Note that after changing the active person in the Pedigree
- View, the display is re-adjusted to show four generations,
- starting from the newly selected Active person. When in the
- Pedigree View, you can easily navigate between the members of
- the displayed family tree as follows:
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To make any displayed person the active person,
- double-click the line that connects to the left side of
- the corresponding box.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To make a child of the currently active person (if any)
- the active person, click the left arrow button to the left
- of the corresponding box. If there is more than one child,
- the button expands to the menu listing the children to
- choose from.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- To move the whole family tree one generation back, click
- on the corresponding right arrow button on the right-hand
- side of the display area. Clicking the upper button will
- move the tree along the paternal line. Clicking the lower
- button will move the tree along the maternal line.
-
-
-
-
- Clicking either of these buttons is completely equivalent
- to double-clicking the lines connecting to the left of the
- corresponding boxes for father and mother.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- You can also quickly access any of the spouses, siblings,
- children, or parents of any displayed person. To do this, move
- the mouse over the desired person's box and right-click to
- invoke a context menu. The appropriate menu items will contain
- submenus listing all spouses, siblings, children, and parents
- of the corresponding person.
-
-
-
- Advantages of using right-click menus
-
-
- Direct access to spouse and siblings
-
-
-
-
- Complete lists of all member of all categories, not only
- the preferred members.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Setting the Home Person
-
-
- One and only one person in the database can be selected as the
- Home person. Once the Home person is selected, moving to that
- person becomes a matter of a single click, regardless of which
- view you are using at the moment.
-
-
-
-
- To set the Home person, first navigate to that person using
- any method you like. Then choose
-
-
- Edit
- Set Home person
- .
-
- Once this is done, you can move to the Home person from
- anywhere in the database by simply clicking the
- Home icon on the toolbar. You can also
- choose
-
-
- Go
- Home
-
-
- from the menu or select Home item from
- any context menu available on the right click.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Using history-based tools
-
-
- &app; also features a powerful set of history-based navigation
- tools. These tools are similar to those commonly used in web
- browsers. They include Back and
- Forward items available from the
-
-
- Go
-
-
- menu, context menus (available in People, Family, and Pedigree
- views), and the toolbar buttons. They also include the list of
- the recent selections available under the
-
-
- Go
-
-
- menu that allows you to jump directly to any of the recent
- selections. Finally, right-clicking on the
- Back and Forward
- toolbar buttons invokes the popup menu with corresponding
- portion of the history. Select any item from the menu to jump
- directly to it.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Bookmarking People
-
-
- Similar to setting the Home person, you can bookmark other
- people from the database to simplify further navigation. To bookmark
- a person, first navigate to that person, then choose
-
-
- Bookmarks
- Add bookmark
- .
-
- To move to that person from anywhere in the database, choose
-
-
- Bookmarks
- Go to bookmark
-
- Person's name
-
- .
-
-
-
-
- You can manage your bookmarks by choosing
-
-
- Bookmarks
- Edit bookmarks...
- .
-
- This opens the following Edit Bookmarks
- dialog with the list of bookmarks and the controls to modify
- this list.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Edit Bookmarks dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Edit Bookmarks dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Finding records
-
-
- To find a record in a database, first switch to the
- appropriate View that provides the list of the desired
- records: People, Sources, Places, or Media. Then start typing
- the name of a person or the title of a Source, Place, or Media
- object that you are looking for, respectively. You may also
- press Ctrl+F to turn on the search mode, but
- simply staring to type is also enough.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Type-ahead find
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows type-ahead find.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- As you type, the first record in the list that is compatible
- with your input will be selected.
-
-
- Finding People
-
-
- For more complex people searches you may want to use
- filters. Enable filter controls by choosing
-
-
- View
- Filter
- ,
-
- select the desired filter, and click Apply.
- For details, see
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Generating Reports
-
- Reports are the most common form of the output produced by
- genealogical research. The majority of genealogical software
- puts a lot of emphasis on developing nice looking reports. &app;
- is no exception in this regard, offering a choice of a variety
- of reports. &app; can generate reports in a multitude of open
- formats, both text based and graphical. &app; can also produce
- screen based reports that are convenient for viewing a summary
- of your database. Finally, &app; can generate a web site
- suitable for immediate posting on the Internet. All of these are
- almost infinitely flexible. If you wish to modify or extend the
- default format of &app; report, you can design and choose the
- style for each of your reports.
-
-
- All reports can be accessed through the menu by choosing
-
- Reports
-
- Report Type
-
-
- Particular Report
-
- .
- Alternatively, you can browse the complete selection of
- available reports along with their brief descriptions in a
- Report Selection dialog invoked by clicking
- the Reports icon on the toolbar.
-
-
-
-
-
- Substitution Values
-
- Many of the graphical reports allow you to customize the
- information on the display. Variable substituions are used
- to substitute date for a particular symbol. There are two
- styles of variables. The difference between the two styles
- is how empty data is handled.
-
-
- The first style of variables are preceeded by a '$'. If
- the variable evaluates to an empty string, the variable is
- replaced with the empty string. The second style of
- variables are preceeded by a '%'. If the variable evaluates
- to an empty string, the line that contains the variable is
- removed from the output.
-
-
-
- $n/%n
-
-
- Displays the person's name in the form of FirstName LastName
-
-
-
-
-
- $N/%N
-
-
- Displays the person's name in the form of LastName, FirstName
-
-
-
-
-
- $i/%i
-
-
- Displays the GRAMPS ID associated with the person.
-
-
-
-
-
- $b/%b
-
-
- Displays the person's date of birth
-
-
-
-
-
- $B/%B
-
-
- Displays the person's place of birth
-
-
-
-
-
- $d/%d
-
-
- Displays the person's date of death
-
-
-
-
-
- $D/%D
-
-
- Displays the person's place of death
-
-
-
-
-
- $s/%s
-
-
- Displays the name of the person's preferred spouse in
- the form of FirstName LastName
-
-
-
-
-
- $S/%S
-
-
- Displays the name of the person's preferred spouse in
- the form of LastName, FirstName.
-
-
-
-
-
- $m/%m
-
-
- Displays the marriage date of the person and the preferred
- spouse.
-
-
-
-
-
- $M/%M
-
-
- Displays the place assocated with the marriage of the
- person and the preferred spouse.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Books
-
-
- Currently, the only available report under this category is
- the Book Report.
-
-
-
-
- The Book Report creates a single document (i.e. a Book)
- containing a collection of graphical and textual reports.
- Consequently, this allows for a very rich set of documents
- that &app; can produce.
-
-
-
-
- When Book Report is selected, the following book configuration
- dialog appears:
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Book Report dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Book Report dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The Book name text entry field is used to
- save the book (a set of configured selections) for future use.
- The top pane lists the items available for inclusion in the
- book. The bottom pane lists the currently selected items in
- the order they will appear in the book.
-
-
-
-
- The horizontal set of buttons by the Book
- name field operates on the whole book. Click the
- Clear button to clear all items from
- the current book. Click the Save button
- to save the current book (under the name typed in the
- Book name text entry field) for future
- use.
-
-
-
-
- Saving the book also saves the configuration for each item.
-
-
-
-
- Click the Open button to load the book
- from the list of previously saved books. Finally, click the
- Edit books button to invoke the
- editable list of available books.
-
-
-
-
- The vertical set of buttons to the right of the bottom pane
- operates on the selected book item. Click the
- Add button to add selected item from
- the available list to the current book. Click the
- Remove button to remove an item from
- the current book. Use Up and
- Down to change the items order in the
- current book. Click the Setup button to
- configure the options of the selected item of the current
- book.
-
-
-
-
- The configuration dialogs invoked by
- Setup are item-specific. If you choose
- not to configure the item, same defaults will be used for all
- needed options. The common option for almost all book items is
- the center person: the person on whom the item is
- centered. Thanks to this option, you can create a book with
- items centered on different people (e.g. your mom's and dad's
- ancestors as separate chapters). By default, the center person
- is set to the active person.
-
-
-
-
- Almost all items available for inclusion in the book are
- textual or graphical reports, and are therefore available in
- the form of standalone reports. The exception is the following
- items which are only available as book items:
-
-
-
-
- Title Page
-
-
-
- This item produces a customized Title page. You can
- configure the text of title, subtitle, and the footer of
- the page. An image can be optionally placed between the
- subtitle and the footer. Because of its
- configurability, this item can be used to create title
- pages for the whole book, its chapter, or even a single
- item.
-
-
-
-
-
- Custom Text
-
-
-
- This item produces a page with three paragraphs, each
- containing custom text. The appearance of the text can
- be adjusted by using custom styles. This item was meant
- to be used for epigraphs, dedications, explanations,
- notes, and so forth.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Code Generators
-
-
- This category contains reports that produce code intended to
- be run through the computer, rather than the usual formatted
- output for human reading. The only code generator currently
- available in &app; is the Relationship Graph producing the
- GraphViz description of the graph.
-
-
-
-
- The Relationship Graph creates a complex relationship graph in
- GraphViz format. The GraphViz dot tool can
- transform the graph into postscript, jpeg, png, vrml, svg, and
- other formats. GraphViz tools are freely available from the
- GraphViz
- site. Specific options for this report include filter
- and number of generations considered, as well as several
- GraphViz-specific options related to pagination, color, and
- details of the graph.
-
-
-
-
-
- If you are not interested in GraphViz code itself and just
- want to generate graphical output, &app; can do it for you
- under the hood. Look for Relationship
- Graph in the Graphical Reports category,
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Graphical Reports
-
-
- Graphical reports represent information in forms of charts and
- graphs. Most of the options are common among graphical
- reports, therefore they will be described only once, at the
- end of this section. The few options which are specific to a
- given report will be described directly in that report's
- entry.
-
-
-
-
- The following graphical reports are currently available in
- &app;:
-
-
-
-
- Ancestor Chart
-
-
-
- This report generates the chart of people who are
- ancestors of the Active person. Specific options include
- the number of generations considered and the format of
- the displayed entries.
-
-
-
-
-
- Ancestor Chart (Wall Chart)
-
-
-
- This report is similar to the Ancestor Chart report. It
- provides more options which make it useful for
- generating huge charts suitable for a poster or a wall
- chart. These options include the ability to compress the
- report (getting rid of an empty space) and the option to
- fit the whole chart on to a single page. In the latter
- case, the contents of the chart is scaled down
- appropriately.
-
-
-
-
-
- Descendant Graph
-
-
-
- This report generates a graph of people who are
- descendants of the Active person. Specific options
- include the format of the displayed entries.
-
-
-
-
-
- Fan Chart
-
-
-
- This report produces a chart resembling a fan, with Active
- person in the center, parents the the semicircle next to
- it, grandparents in the next semicircle, and so on, for a
- total of five generations.
-
-
-
-
-
- Relationship Graph
-
-
-
- This report creates a complex relationship graph in
- GraphViz format and then converts into graphical output
- running it through the the GraphViz
- dot tool behind the scene. Specific
- options for this report include filter, options for
- dates and places for the events, and whether to include
- URLs and IDs for individuals and families. There are
- also several GraphViz-specific options related to
- pagination, color, and details of the graph.
-
-
-
-
-
- Statistics Chart
-
-
-
- This report can collect and display a wealth of
- statistical data about your database. Specific options
- include filter, sorting methods, and additional birth-
- and gender-based limit for inclusion into statistics.
- You can also set the minimum number of items to qualify
- for the bar chart, so that the charts with fewer items
- will generate a pie chart instead. The Chart
- Selection tab allows you to check which
- charts you want to include in your report.
-
-
-
-
-
- Timeline Graph
-
-
-
- This report outputs the list of people with their
- lifetimes represented by intervals on a common
- chronological scale. Specific options include filter,
- sorting method, and the title of the report.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Common options for graphical reports are the filename of the
- output, the format of the output, selected style, page size
- and orientation. Optionally, the reports can be immediately
- opened with the default application.
-
-
-
-
-
- The options used in reports are persistent: each report
- remembers its options used last time.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Text Reports
-
-
- Text reports represent the desired information as formatted
- text. Most of the options are common among text reports,
- therefore they will be described only once, at the end of this
- section. The options which are specific to a given report will
- be described directly in that report's entry.
-
-
-
-
- The following text reports are currently available in &app;:
-
-
-
-
- Ahnentafel Report
-
-
-
- This report lists the active person and his or her
- ancestors along with their vital data. The people are
- numbered in a special way which is an established
- standard called Ahnentafel. The active person is given
- number 1. His or her father and mother have numbers 2
- and 3, respectively. This rule holds for every person
- while going back in generations: father's parents are
- numbered 4 and 5, and mother's parents are numbered 6
- and 7, fathers always numbered with even and mothers
- with odd numbers. Therefore, for any person having
- number N in this tree, the numbers of father and mother
- are 2N and 2N+1, respectively.
-
-
-
-
-
- Complete Individual Report
-
-
-
- This report provides individual summaries similar to
- that of the Individual Summary report. The advantage of
- this report is the specific filter option. Depending on
- the filter choice (active person only, his or her
- descendants, his or her ancestors, or entire database),
- the report may contain from one to many individual
- summaries. Another option for this report is the
- inclusion of source information when listing events.
-
-
-
-
-
- Comprehensive Ancestors Report
-
-
-
- This report produces a comprehensive description of
- ancestors of the active person. The highlights of this
- report include elaborate layout, images of children,
- present and former spouses, and source
- citations. Specific options: number of backward
- generations to consider, whether to cite sources, and
- whether to break pages between generations.
-
-
-
-
-
- Descendant Report
-
-
-
- This report produces a brief description of descendants
- of the active person. Specific options: number of
- forward generations to consider.
-
-
-
-
-
- Detailed Ancestral Report
-
-
-
- This report covers in detail the ancestors of the active
- person. It includes vital data (birth and death) as well
- as marriages. Specific options: number of backward
- generations to consider, as well as a variety of options
- regarding the exact contents to include.
-
-
-
-
-
- Detailed Descendant Report
-
-
-
- This report covers in detail the descendants of the
- active person. It includes vital (birth and death)
- information as well as marriages. Specific options:
- number of forward generations to consider.
-
-
-
-
-
- FTM Style Ancestral Report
-
-
-
- This report creates an ancestral report similar to that
- produced by the Family Tree Maker (tm) program. It
- covers in detail the active person and his/her ancestors
- It includes vital information as well as marriages,
- children, and notes. Specific options: number of
- backward generations to consider.
-
-
-
-
-
- FTM Style Descendant Report
-
-
-
- This report creates a descendant report similar to that
- produced by the Family Tree Maker (tm) program. It
- covers in detail the active person and his/her
- descendants. It includes vital information as well as
- marriages, children, and notes. Specific options: number
- of forward generations to consider.
-
-
-
-
-
- Family Group Report
-
-
-
- This creates a family group report, showing information
- on a set of parents and their children. Specific
- options: the spouse (available only if the active person
- has more than one spouse).
-
-
-
-
-
- Individual Summary
-
-
-
- This report produces a detailed summary on the active
- person. The report includes all the facts known to the
- database about that person.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Common options for text reports are the filename of the
- output, the format of the output, selected style, page size
- and orientation. For HTML reports, there is no page
- information. Instead, HTML options include the choice of the
- HTML template, either available in &app; or a custom template
- defined by you. Optionally, the reports can be immediately
- opened with the default application.
-
-
-
- The options used in reports are persistent: each report
- remembers its options used last time.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- View Reports
-
-
- View reports are representing overall summaries of the
- database information available immediately for on-screen
- viewing. The following view reports are currently available
- in &app;:
-
-
-
-
- Number of ancestors
-
-
-
- This report displays the number of ancestors of the
- active person.
-
-
-
-
-
- Summary of the database
-
-
-
- This report displays the overall statistics concerning
- number of individuals of each gender, various incomplete
- entries statistics, as well as family and media
- statistics.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Web Page
- The only available report in this category
- is the Narrative Web Site report. It generates a
- web site (that is, a set of linked web pages), for
- a set of selected individuals.
-
-
-
- Narrative Web Site
-
-
-
- Introduction
-
-
- &app; 2.0.6 introduced the Narrative Web generator.
- The new tool provides considerably more functionality
- than the older web generator. Instead of using HTML
- templates to customize the pages, CSS style sheets are used.
-
-
-
- More information is now displayed about each person,
- along with information about sources, places, and media
- objects. Introduction pages can be added to provide additional
- information, such as family history.
-
-
-
- Selecting the output
-
-
- Genealogy records can generate a lot of files. Many web
- servers have a difficult time with many files in a single
- directory. The Narrative Web Generator strives to keep the
- number of files per directory to a managable level. To do
- this, a hierarchy of directores is created. The generated
- files names are not intuitive, but are unique per person.
- Subsequent runs will geneate identical file names, making
- it easy to replace files.
-
-
- By default, the output files are written to the specified
- directory. Because of the number of files and directories
- that are created, it may be difficult to transfer the files
- to an external web host. To aid in this, you may directly
- create a gzip'd tar file to more easily upload the data.
- This is the format that should be used if you would like
- to take advantage of the free genealogy page hosting at the
- GRAMPS web hosting site.
-
- To select the gzip'd tar file, select the Store
- web pages in .tar.gz archive option.
-
-
-
- Applying a filter
-
-
- Like the previous web page generator, and most of the other
- &app; reports, you can control what is included in the output
- by choosing a filter. Several default filters are provided for
- you, but you are free to use the Custom Filter Editor tool to
- create your own.
-
- Any person matching this filter who is not excluded due
- to the privacy rules, will be included in the output. The default
- filter includes all people in the database.
-
-
-
- Applying a style sheet
-
- GRAMPS provides six built in style sheets for your web page.
- Each of these style sheets produces a unique look for your pages.
- The generated style sheet is named narrative.css.
- You may edit this file if you wish to further customize your
- site.
-
-
- If you make modifications to your style sheet, you need to be aware
- the regenerating the pages with the same output directory will
- overwrite your changes to this file. To prevent this from happening,
- make sure you choose No style sheet for subsequent
- runs.
-
-
-
- Character set encoding
-
-
- Because of GRAMPS internationalization ability, the default character
- set for the HTML pages is UTF-8. This provides support for virtually
- all characters.
-
- The Apache web server is sometimes misconfigured to override
- the character set specified in an HTML page. This causes problems with
- the UTF-8 character set generated by GRAMPS, distorting characters on
- the screen.
-
- If your web server is misconfigured and you do not have priveledge
- to fix the configururation, you may solve this problem by overriding the
- default character set to match what your web server may be expecting.
-
-
-
- Copyright notice
-
- International copyright law reserves all rights to your data.
- You own the data, and people must get your permission to use it.
- In genealogy, however, sharing data is a common ideal. It this case, you
- may wish to grant the user more rights.
-
- While the default for GRAMPS is to place a notice indicating that
- all rights are reserved, we give you the option to place your site under
- one of several of the Create Commons licenses. With a Creative Commons
- license, you grant user's certain permission to use your data without
- requiring them to contact you directly for permission.
-
- See the Creative
- Commons web site for more information.
-
-
-
- Controlling page generation
-
- Three additional pages can be generated by the web page generator.
- The Home page is a page that will display an image and a whatever text
- you wish. To enable this page, choose a Media Object
- from the Home Media/Note ID menu on the Page
- Generation tab. If the Media Object contains an image, the image
- is displayed at the top of the page. If the Media Object contains a Note,
- the Note's text is used for the text of the page. A second page, the
- Introduction page, works similarly. Just choose the Media Object in the
- Introduction Media/Note ID menu.
-
- If you choose to include a contact page, the researcher information
- stored in the database is displayed, along with the information specified
- in the Publisher contact/Note ID menu. Please use
- this page with caution,
- since you may consider your contact information to be private.
-
-
-
- Privacy
-
- Privacy of personal information is an important issue on the web
- today. &app; tries to give you control over the information that is presented.
-
-
- &app; provides two options to control the privacy of your information.
- If you select the Do not include records marked private
- option, any data that is marked as private will not be displayed on the
- generated site. If you select Restrict information on living people,
- &app; will attempt to determine which people have the potential of still
- being alive, and will omit these people from the database. Some countries
- have laws that indicate that a certain number of years must pass after
- someone's death before information can be published. The Years
- to restrict from person's death option allows you to specifiy
- how many years a person must be deceased before the information is included.
-
-
- Please note that it is your responsibility to double check all
- information in the pages for any privacy information. &app; cannot be held
- responsible for any privacy issues.
-
-
-
- Adding custom code your pages
-
- If you are not interested in customizing your pages, you may skip
- the section.
-
- The previous web generator allowed you to customize your pages
- using HTML templates. Your data would be substituted for certain markers
- in the code.
-
- This method proved to be too cumbersome for most users. The Narrative
- Web Page Generator introduces a simpler mechanism. On the Page
- Generation tab, you may specify text (including HTML code) that
- will be inserted into each page, separately for the header and the
- footer.
-
- To create this code, you need to create a Media Object marked as an
- internal note. To create this, add a new Media Object in the Media View,
- and select the internal note option. You may then enter your HTML code.
-
-
-
- To insert the code from the internal notes into the web pages,
- select the appropriate Media Objects from the HTML user
- header and HTML user footer menus.
- Two div sections will be added to the pages - userheader and userfooter.
- The corresponding HTML code is inserted into the HTML page surrounded by div
- markers. You can customize your style sheet to provide additional formatting
- and positioning information to control these sections.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Running Tools
-
-
- &app; tools allow you to perform various types of analysis of
- your genealogical data. Typically, the tools do not produce
- output in form of printouts or files. Instead, they produce
- screen output immediately available for the
- researcher. However, when appropriate, you can save the
- results of running a tool into a file. Tools present one of
- the major strengths of &app; compared to the most genealogical
- software.
-
-
-
-
- The tools can be accessed through the menu by choosing
-
-
- Tools
-
- Tool Section
-
-
- Particular Tool
-
- .
-
- Alternatively, you can browse the complete selection of
- available tools along with their brief descriptions in a
- Tool Selection dialog invoked by clicking
- the Tools icon on the toolbar.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Analysis and Exploration
-
-
- This section contains tools which analyze and explore the
- database, but do not alter it. The following analysis and exploration
- tools are currently available in &app;:
-
-
-
-
- Compare individual events
-
-
-
- This tool compares events across the selected group of
- people. The people for this comparison are chosen with
- the use of custom filters. The custom filters can be
- created in the Custom Filter Editor (see ) that can be invoked by
- clicking the Custom Filter Editor
- button. The resulting table produced by this tool can be
- saved as a spreadsheet.
-
-
-
-
-
- Interactive descendant browser
-
-
-
- This tool builds a tree with the active person being the
- root. Children branch from their parents in the usual
- manner. Use this tool for a quick glance of a person's
- descendants.
-
-
-
-
- Double-clicking on tree node will bring up the
- Edit Person dialog allowing to
- view or modify the personal data.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Database Processing
-
-
- This section contains tools which may modify your database.
- The tools from this section are used mostly for finding and
- correcting errors in the data. The following database
- processing tools are currently available in &app;:
-
-
-
-
-
- The modifications will only be performed upon your explicit
- consent, except for the automatic fixes performed by
- Check and repair database tool.
-
-
-
-
-
- Check and repair database
-
-
-
- This tool checks the database for integrity problems,
- fixing the problems it can. Specifically, the tool is
- checking for:
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Broken family links. These are the cases when a
- person's record refers to a family while the
- family's record does not refer to that person, and
- vice versa.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Missing media objects. The missing media object is
- the object whose file is referenced in the database
- but does not exist. This can happen when the file is
- accidentally deleted, renamed, or moved to another
- location.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Empty families. These are the family entries which
- have no reference to any person as their member.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Parent relationship. This checks all families to
- ensure that father and mother are not mixed up. The
- check is also made that parents have different
- gender. If they have common gender then their
- relationship is renamed to "Partners".
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Extract information from names
-
-
-
- This tool searches the entire database and attempts to
- extract titles and nicknames that may be embedded in a
- person's Given name field. If any
- information could be extracted, the candidates for
- fixing will be presented in the table. You may then
- decide which to repair as suggested and which not to.
-
-
-
-
-
- Find possible duplicate people
-
-
-
- This tool searches the entire database, looking for the
- entries that may represent the same person.
-
-
-
-
-
- Fix capitalization of family names
-
-
-
- This tool searches the entire database and attempts to
- fix the capitalization of family names. The aim is to
- have conventional capitalization: capital first letter
- and lower case for the rest of the family name. If
- deviations from this rule are detected, the candidates
- for fixing will be presented in the table. You may then
- decide which to repair as suggested and which not to.
-
-
-
-
-
- Rename personal event types
-
-
-
- This tool allows all the events of a certain name
- to be renamed to a new name.
-
-
-
-
-
- Reorder &app; IDs
-
-
- This tool reorders the &app; IDs according to the
- defaults of &app;.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Debug
-
-
- This section contains debugging tools that are not of general
- interest for many of the users of &app;. If you're not
- interested in debugging or developing &app; you may safely
- skip this section.
-
-
-
-
- Python evaluation window
-
-
-
- Enter expression into the Evaluation
- Window, get the output in Output
- Window. Any errors should end up in the
- Error Window.
-
-
-
-
-
- Reload plugins
-
-
- Makes an attempt to reload all plugins.
-
-
-
- This tool is itself a plugin, but it will not reload itself!
-
-
-
-
-
- Show uncollected objects
-
-
-
- Provides the window listing all uncollected objects.
- Depending on the system settings, recently abandoned GUI
- objects may still be uncollected.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Utilities
-
-
- This section contains tools allowing you to perform a simple
- operation on a portion of data. The results can be saved in
- your database, but they will not modify your existing data.
- The following utilities are currently available in &app;:
-
-
-
- Custom Filter Editor
-
-
- The Custom Filter Editor builds custom filters that can be
- used to select people included in reports, exports, and
- other tools and utilities. This is in fact a very powerful
- tool in genealogical analysis.
-
-
-
-
- When you launch it, the User defined
- filters dialog appears that lists all the filters
- (if any) previously defined by you. Click the
- Add... button to define a new filter.
- Once you have designed your filters, you can edit, test, and
- delete selected filters using the
- Edit...,
- Test..., and
- Delete buttons, respectively. All the
- filters displayed in the list will be automatically saved
- along with your database and will be available with
- subsequent sessions of &app;.
-
-
-
-
-
- The changes made to the filters only take effect when you
- click the Apply and close button.
-
-
-
-
-
- Clicking the Add... button invokes the
- following Define filter dialog:
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Define filter dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Define filter dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Type the name for your new filter into the
- Name field. Enter any comment that
- would help you identify this filter in the future into the
- Comment field. Add as many rules to the
- Rule list as you would like to your
- filter using Add... button. If the
- filter has more than one rule, select one of the
- Rule operations. This allows you to
- choose whether all rules must apply, only one (either) rule
- must apply, or exactly one (either) rule must apply, in
- order for the filter to generate a match. If your filter has
- only one rule, this selection has no effect.
-
-
-
-
- Check Return values that do not match the filter
- rules to invert the filter rule. For example,
- inverting "has a common ancestor with I1" rule will match
- everyone who does not have a common ancestor with that
- person).
-
-
-
-
- Clicking the Add... button invokes
- the following Add Rule dialog:
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Add Rule dialog
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Add Rule dialog.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The pane on the left-hand side displays available filter
- rules arranged by their categories in an expandable
- tree. For detailed filter rule reference, see . Click on the arrows to
- fold/unfold the appropriate category. Select the rule from
- the tree by clicking on its name. The right-hand side
- displays the name, the description, and the values for the
- currently selected rule. Once you are satisfied with your
- rule selection and its values, click
- OK to add this rule to the rule list
- of the currently edited filter. Clicking
- Cancel will abort adding the rule to
- the filter.
-
-
-
-
-
- A filter you have already designed may be used as a rule
- for another filter. This gives you nearly infinite
- flexibility in custom-tailoring your selection criteria
- that can be later used in most of the exports, reports,
- and some of the tools (such as comparing individual
- events).
-
-
-
-
-
- Scratch Pad
-
-
- This tool provides a temporary note pad to store database
- records for easy reuse. In short, this is a sort of the
- copy-and-paste functionality extended from textual objects
- to other types of records used in &app;.
-
-
-
-
- Scratch Pad makes extensive use of drag-and-drop technique.
-
-
-
- To invoke Scratch Pad, either choose
-
-
- Tools
- Utilities
- Scratch Pad
-
-
- or click the ScratchPad button on the
- toolbar. The following window will appear:
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Scratch Pad tool
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Shows Add Scratch Pad tool.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Scratch Pad supports addresses, attributes (both personal
- and family), events (both personal and family), names, media
- objects references, source references, URLs, and of course
- textual information of notes and comments. To store any type
- of these records, simply drag the existing record on to the
- Scratch Pad from the corresponding editor dialog. To reuse
- the record, drag it from the Scratch Pad on to the
- corresponding place in the editor, e.g. Address tab,
- Attribute tab, etc.
-
-
-
-
-
- Some objects are showing the link icon on the left. This
- indicates that dragging such selection will produce a
- reference to an existing object, not copy the object
- itself.
-
-
-
-
- For example, the media object file will not be duplicated.
- Instead, the reference will be made to an existing media
- object, which will result in the local gallery entry.
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Scratch Pad storage is persistent within a single &app;
- session. Closing the window will not lose the stored
- records. However, exiting &app; will.
-
-
-
-
-
- Other tools
-
-
- Generate SoundEx codes
-
-
-
- This utility generates SoundEx codes for the names of
- people in the database. Please visit the NARA Soundex Indexing page to
- learn more about Soundex Indexing System.
-
-
-
-
-
- Relationship calculator
-
-
-
- This utility calculates and displays the relationship
- of any person to the active person.
-
-
-
-
-
- Verify the database
-
-
-
- This utility allows you to verify the database based
- on the set of criteria specified by you.
-
-
-
-
-
- Difference between Verify tool and previously
- described Check tool
-
-
-
-
- The Check tool detects inconsistencies in the
- database structure. The Verify tool, however, is
- detecting the records that do not satisfy your
- particular criteria.
-
-
-
-
-
- For example, you may want to make sure that nobody in
- your database had children at the age of 98. Based on
- common sense, such a record would indicate an
- error. However, it is not a consistency error in the
- database. Besides, someone might have a child at the
- age of 98 (although this rarely happens). The Verify
- tool will display everything that violates your
- criteria so that you can check whether the record is
- erroneous or not. The ultimate decision is yours.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-